®
ACCULINK DSU/CSU
Models 3160-A3, 3161-B3,
3164-A2, and 3165-A2
Operator’s Guide
Document No. 3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
!
Important Safety Instructions
1. Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the product or included in the manual.
2. This product (when not powered by the optional direct feed cable) is intended to be used with a 3-wire grounding
type plug – a plug which has a grounding pin. This is a safety feature. Equipment grounding is vital to ensure safe
operation. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug by modifying the plug or using an adapter.
Prior to installation, use an outlet tester or a voltmeter to check the ac receptacle for the presence of earth ground.
If the receptacle is not properly grounded, the installation must not continue until a qualified electrician has
corrected the problem.
If a 3-wire grounding type power source is not available, consult a qualified electrician to determine another
method of grounding the equipment.
3. Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable operation of the product and to
protect it from overheating, these slots and openings must not be blocked or covered.
4. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the product where persons will walk on the power
cord.
5. Do not attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous high
voltage points or other risks. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
6. General purpose cables are provided with this product. Special cables, which may be required by the regulatory
inspection authority for the installation site, are the responsibility of the customer.
7. When installed in the final configuration, the product must comply with the applicable Safety Standards and
regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed. If necessary, consult with the appropriate regulatory
agencies and inspection authorities to ensure compliance.
8. A rare phenomenon can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or more buildings. If products
installed in separate buildings are interconnected, the voltage potential may cause a hazardous condition.
Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and, if necessary,
implement corrective action prior to interconnecting the products.
9. This product contains a coin cell lithium battery that is only to be replaced at the factory. Caution: There is a
danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same type. Dispose of used
batteries according to the battery manufacturer’s instructions. Attention: Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a
remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type. Mettre au rebut
les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
10. In addition, if the equipment is to be used with telecommunications circuits, take the following precautions:
—
—
—
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the
network interface.
—
—
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of
electric shock from lightning.
—
Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct Feed Power Supply Warning
!
WARNING:
When energizing this product with the supplied direct feed power cable, connect only to a SELV (Safety
Extra Low Voltage) power source with a maximum available output of less than 240 VA. Power
configurations which utilize the direct feed cable to energize the equipment must only be installed by a
qualified electrician in restricted area access locations in accordance with articles 110-16, 110-17, and
110-18 of the National Electric Code (NEC), and articles 2-308, 2-310, 2-312, 2-314, 2-200, and 2-202 of the
Canadian Electric Code (CEC).
A readily accessible disconnect device as part of the building installation shall be incorporated in fixed
wiring. The disconnect device (a 24 or 48 Vdc, 15 or 20 A circuit breaker or switch) must be included in the
ungrounded supply conductor. Over current protection must be a 24 or 48 Vdc, 15 or 20 A fuse or circuit
breaker.
EMI Notices
!
UNITED STATES – EMI NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense.
The authority to operate this equipment is conditioned by the requirements that no modifications will be
made to the equipment unless the changes or modifications are expressly approved by Paradyne
Corporation.
!
CANADA – EMI NOTICE:
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian interference-causing equipment
regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du réglement sur le matérial
brouilleur du Canada.
C
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Government Requirements and Equipment Return
Certain governments require that instructions pertaining to CSU and modem connection to the telephone network be
included in the installation and operation manual. Specific instructions are listed in the following sections.
United States
NOTICE TO USERS OF THE UNITED STATES TELEPHONE NETWORK
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the equipment is a label that contains, among other
information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. The label is
located on the bottom of the standalone 3160, 3164, or 3165 DSU/CSU, and on the 3161 DSU/CSU’s circuit card.
If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
2. There are two types of telephone lines associated with the standalone equipment. The T1 network connection
should be made using a Universal Service Order Code (USOC) type RJ48C jack. The Service Order Code 6.0F
should be specified to the telephone company when ordering the T1 line. In addition, the proper Facility Interface
Code must be specified to the Telephone Company. The DSU/CSU can be configured to support any of the
following framing format and line signaling techniques. The DSU/CSU’s configuration must correspond to the T1
line’s parameters. The standalone 3160, 3164, or 3165 DSU/CSU’s internal modem connects to the Public
Switched Telephone Network using a USOC Type RJ11C jack. The Facility Interface Code 02LS2 along with the
RJ11C jack should be specified to the telephone company when ordering a dial line for the modem. The
3161 DSU/CSU connects to the T1 network using the multi-line USOC-type RJ48H jack and does not have a
PSTN interface.
316x DSU/CSU Facility Interface Codes
Code
Description
04DU9-BN
04DU9-DN
04DU9-1KN
04DU-1SN
1.544 Mbps superframe format (SF) without line power
1.544 Mbps SF and B8ZS without line power
1.544 Mbps ANSI ESF without line power
1.544 Mbps ANSI ESF and B8ZS without line power
3. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the
telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an
incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the
number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone
company to determine the maximum RENs for the calling area.
4. If the 316x DSU/CSU causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance
that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the telephone
company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with
the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
5. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect
the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you
to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If you experience trouble with this equipment, please contact your sales or service representative (as appropriate)
for repair or warranty information. If the product needs to be returned to the company service center for repair,
contact them directly for return instructions using one of the following methods:
—
—
Internet: Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http://www.paradyne.com
Telephone: Call our automated response system to receive current information via fax or to speak with a
company representative.
Within the U.S.A., call 1-800-870-2221
Outside the U.S.A., call 1-727-530-2340
If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you remove the
equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
7. The equipment’s modem cannot be used on public coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to
Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs. (Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission
or corporation commission for information.)
8. FCC compliant telephone line cords with modular plugs are provided with this equipment. This equipment is
designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is
Part 68 compliant.
Canada
NOTICE TO USERS OF THE CANADIAN TELEPHONE NETWORK
The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the
equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements. The
Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In
some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of
a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the
above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the
supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request to disconnect the equipment.
CAUTION:
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate
electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
If your equipment is in need of repair, return it using the procedures described on page A in the front of this document.
E
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Physical Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Important Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Cabling Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Power-Up Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Test Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Displaying Unit Identity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Allocating DS0 Channels from the DTE Drop/Insert Interface
to the Network Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Setting a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
ii
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Initiating a Call for PC, ASCII Terminal/Printer, or
SNMP Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Self-Test Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
SNMP Traps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Test Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Test Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Lamp Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
T1 Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
AUX Port Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
COM Port Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
External Clock Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16
iv
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
MIB II (RFC 1213) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
Enterprise MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-27
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Scenario 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Scenario 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
Scenario 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4
Scenario 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
Scenario 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
Menu Organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-4
Setting a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-13
vi
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Document Purpose and Intended Audience
This operator’s guide contains installation, operation, and maintenance information
for the ACCULINK 3160, 3161, 3164, or 3165 Data Service Unit (DSU)/Channel
Service Unit (CSU).
It is designed for installers and users of DSU/CSUs familiar with the operation of
digital data communication equipment.
Document Summary
Section
Description
Describes the 316x DSU/CSUs and their features.
Describes how to install the standalone units and make
connections. (Instructions for the carrier-mounted 3161
DSU/CSU are contained in the ACCULINK 3151 CSU and
3161 DSU/CSU General Information Guide, Document
No. 3100-A2-GK40.)
Provides instructions for using the front panel, changing
configuration options, establishing security, and using the
internal modem.
Contains procedures for monitoring, testing, and
troubleshooting.
Contains a menu tree showing all the main front panel
functions.
Contains technical specifications for the 316x DSU/CSUs.
Contains all the configuration options and default settings.
Describes the MIB objects supported by the DSU/CSUs.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Section
Description
Provides sample IP addressing schemes.
Explains how to use front panel emulation software in lieu
of the front panel.
Explains how to use a VT100-compatible terminal to
configure and control the unit.
Contains order numbers for cables and other related
parts.
Defines abbreviations and terms used in this document.
Lists key terms, concepts, and sections in alphabetical
order.
Product-Related Documents
Document Number
Document Title
3000-A2-GA31
COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation
Manual
3000-A2-GB41
3100-A2-GK40
COMSPHERE –48 VDC Central Office Power Unit
Installation Guide
ACCULINK 3151 CSU and 3161 DSU/CSU General
Information Guide
3162-A2-GB20
3163-A2-GB20
3166-A2-GB20
ACCULINK 3162 DSU/CSU User’s Guide
ACCULINK 3163 DSU/CSU User’s Guide
ACCULINK 3166 DSU/CSU User’s Guide
Contact your sales or service representative to order additional product
documentation.
Paradyne documents are also available on the World Wide Web at
www.paradyne.com. Select Library → Technical Manuals.
viii
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Reference Documents
AT&T Technical Reference 54016
AT&T Technical Reference 62411
ANSI T1.403-1989
Industry Canada CS-03
CSA-22.2 No. 950
Industry Canada (ICES)-003
FCC Part 15
FCC Part 68
UL 1950
Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP/IP-Based
Internets: MIBII. RFC 1213, March 1991
Definitions of Managed Objects for the DS1 and E1 Interface Types.
RFC 1406, January 1993
Definitions of Managed Objects for RS-232-like Hardware Devices.
RFC 1317, April 1992
Extensions to the Generic-Interface MIB. RFC 1229, May 1991
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
x
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
1
Overview
The ACCULINK® 316x DSU/CSU acts as an interface between the T1 digital
network and the customer premises equipment, converting signals received from
the DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) to bipolar signals that can be transmitted over
T1 lines. Typical applications include shared access to network-based services,
Local Area Network (LAN)/Wide Area Network (WAN) interconnection, and
fractional T1 network applications.
In addition to the T1 network interface and the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface,
the Model 3160 provides two synchronous data ports while the Model 3164
provides four synchronous data ports. The Model 3165 provides one synchronous
data port, but does not provide the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
The Model 3161 (carrier-mounted DSU/CSU) provides two ports in addition to the
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface and is designed to fit into the COMSPHERE
3000 Series Carrier.
For more information about the carrier-mounted DSU/CSU, refer to the ACCULINK
3151 CSU and 3161 DSU/CSU General Information Guide and the COMSPHERE
3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual.
Features
The DSU/CSU optimizes network performance with a wide range of features such
as the following:
Software configuration menu displayed via a liquid crystal display (LCD) to
permit quick and easy operation, and elimination of complicated hardware
strapping.
Local or remote configuration and operation flexibility.
Several loopback capabilities and test pattern generators.
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) capability.
Alarm message display/print capability.
Front panel emulation via Windows-based Front Panel Emulation software.
Integral modem for standalone DSU/CSUs.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Introduction
Asynchronous (async) terminal interface support.
Telnet access for remote async terminal operations.
Network management provided through industry-standard Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP).
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Interface
The DTE Drop/Insert interface allows DTEs/PBXs that support the DS1 signal
format to share the T1 network with other high-speed equipment. This is available
on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.
Alarm Message Capability
The DSU/CSU can be attached, either locally or remotely, to an ASCII terminal or
printer to display or print alarm messages. Alarms can also be displayed on a PC
that is using a terminal emulation package.
Front Panel Emulation
The DSU/CSU offers functionality through Front Panel Emulation software that is
similar to that provided by the DSU/CSU front panel. The functionality of the front
panel is available by clicking on the function keys with the mouse rather than by
pressing keys from the actual front panel.
Integral Modem
The standalone DSU/CSUs contain an integral low-speed (2400 bps), V.22bis dial
modem that enables communication with remote devices such as another
316x DSU/CSU, an ASCII terminal or printer, or a PC running the 3100 Series
Front Panel Emulation software.
Async Terminal Interface Support
The DSU/CSU can be configured and managed from an asynchronous (async)
terminal. The async terminal’s full screen display uses a menu hierarchy similar to
the DSU/CSU’s front panel. You can perform device management and
configuration operations as if you are using the DSU/CSU’s front panel, but you do
not have the limitation of the 2-line, 16-character LCD.
Telnet Access
Remote async terminal operations can be performed using Telnet access. Telnet is
a Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) service that supports a
virtual terminal interface.
1-2
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Introduction
SNMP Management Support
SNMP is a network management protocol that is used to monitor network
performance and status, and to report alarms (i.e., traps). To function, SNMP
requires a manager consisting of a software program housed within a workstation
or PC; an agent consisting of a software program housed within a device (e.g., the
DSU/CSU); and a Management Information Base (MIB) consisting of a database
of managed objects. The DSU/CSU can be managed by any industry-standard
SNMP manager.
Two link layer protocols, Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) and Serial Line Internet
Protocol (SLIP), are supported for connection to an external SNMP manager or
network device (e.g., a router).
The SNMP manager or network device can be directly connected to the
communications (COM) port. An external LAN Adapter can be connected to either
the COM port or the auxiliary (AUX) port to provide Ethernet connectivity. Also, the
DSU/CSU can be daisy chained together by connecting the COM port of one
device to the AUX port of the other, providing SNMP connectivity.
The SNMP management system can communicate to the DSU/CSU remotely
through the Facility Data Link (FDL) or (for 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs) the
synchronous data port’s Embedded Data Link (EDL).
Physical Description
The 316x Series consists of a Model 3160 DSU/CSU (2-port), a Model 3164
DSU/DSU (4-port), a Model 3165 DSU/CSU (1-port), and a Model 3161
(carrier-mounted) DSU/CSU.
For more information about the carrier-mounted DSU/CSU, refer to the ACCULINK
3151 CSU and 3161 DSU/CSU General Information Guide and the COMSPHERE
3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual.
Standalone DSU/CSU Front Panel
The standalone DSU/CSU front panel contains,
One 2-line, 16-alphanumeric-character-per-line liquid crystal display (LCD)
One 7-button keypad (three Function and four directional keys)
Twelve light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Six test jacks for the Model 3160/3164 DSU/CSU, and two test jacks for the
Model 3165 DSU/CSU
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Introduction
LCD
ACCULINK
F1
F2
F3
MON EQPT
NET
In
In
In
OK FAIL TEST SIG OOF ALRM EER SIG OOF ALRM PDV BPV
NETWORK DTR TXD RXD CTS RTS
3160
Out
Out
Out
496-14936
Figure 1-1. 3160 DSU/CSU Front Panel
LCD
ACCULINK
F1
F2
F3
MON EQPT
NET
In
In
In
OK FAIL TEST SIG OOF ALRM EER SIG OOF ALRM PDV BPV
NETWORK DTR TXD RXD CTS RTS
3164
Out
Out
Out
496-14937
Figure 1-2. 3164 DSU/CSU Front Panel
1-4
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Introduction
LCD
ACCULINK
F1
F2
F3
NET
MON
In
OK FAIL TEST SIG OOF ALRM EER
NETWORK
DTR TXD RXD CTS RTS
PORT
3165
Out
495-14567-01
Figure 1-3. 3165 DSU/CSU Front Panel
Standalone DSU/CSU Rear Panel
The standalone DSU/CSU rear panel contains the connectors required for the
AUX
PORT 2
PORT 1
EXT CLK
DSX-1
POWER
COM
MODEM
NET
99-16234
Figure 1-4. 3160 DSU/CSU Rear Panel
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Introduction
COM PORT MODEM
NETWORK
POWER
AUX PORT
DTE
NEC
CLASS 2
INPUT
CAUTION:AUX PORT OR COM PORT MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO PSTN OR T1 NETWORK
PORT 3
PORT 4
CLOCK IN
PORT 1
PORT 2
494-14564
Figure 1-5. 3164 DSU/CSU Rear Panel
COM PORT MODEM
PORT 1
NETWORK
POWER
NEC
CLASS 2
INPUT
CAUTION:AUX PORT OR COM PORT MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO PSTN OR T1 NETWORK
495-14565-01
Figure 1-6. 3165 DSU/CSU Rear Panel
1-6
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Introduction
Table 1-1. Standalone DSU/CSU Rear Panel Connectors
Name
Function
POWER
Supplies power to the DSU/CSU by providing an
attachment for the ac power module or the optional dc
power cable (+24 or –48 Vdc).
AUX PORT
COM PORT
Supports SNMP LAN Adapter or daisy-chain connections.
Provides access to a locally connected PC, ASCII terminal
or printer, SNMP management link, or async terminal
interface.
MODEM
Provides a connection to the integral modem for access to
a remotely connected PC, ASCII terminal or printer, SNMP
management link, or async terminal interface.
NETWORK
Provides access to the T1 network.
DTE (Model 3160/3164)
Provides access to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Used to attach an external clock to the DSU/CSU.
CLOCK IN (Models
3160/3164)
PORTs 1–4
Used to connect the customer's synchronous data DTE to
the DSU/CSU.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Introduction
1-8
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2
Overview
This chapter contains information for installing your standalone DSU/CSU. It
includes application examples, cabling, and power-up information.
NOTE:
Installation instructions for the carrier-mounted DSU/CSU are located in the
ACCULINK 3151 CSU and 3161 DSU/CSU General Information Guide and
the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual.
Application Examples
The DSU/CSU acts as an interface between the T1 digital network and the
customer’s equipment.
The DSU/CSU is connected to the customer’s equipment through one of the
synchronous data ports (PORTs 1– 4) or the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. It
is connected to the T1 digital network through the network interface.
NOTE:
The DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface is only available on 2-port and 4-port
DSU/CSUs.
Some common applications for the DSU/CSU are:
Point-to-Point LAN interconnection (Figure 2-1, Point-to-Point Application
Example).
Shared access to network-based services (Figure 2-2, Shared Access
Fractional T1 network applications (Figure 2-3, Fractional T1 Application
Example).
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Installation
NETWORK
LAN
ROUTER
DSU/CSU
DSU/CSU
LAN
ROUTER
496-15003-01
Figure 2-1. Point-to-Point Application Example
PBX
NETWORK
SERVICES
DSU/CSU
LAN
ROUTER
496-15004-01
Figure 2-2. Shared Access Application Example
LAN
ROUTER
DSU/CSU
LAN
ROUTER
FRACTIONAL
NETWORK
DSU/CSU
LAN
ROUTER
LAN
ROUTER
DSU/CSU
496-15005-01
Figure 2-3. Fractional T1 Application Example
2-2
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Installation
SNMP or Telnet Connection Examples
The DSU/CSU can be connected to an SNMP or Telnet system in a number of
ways. Some examples include:
Connecting the COM port to a network device (e.g., a router) (Figure 2-5,
Connecting the COM port or the AUX port to an external LAN Adapter for
Daisy chaining the COM port of one device to the AUX port of the other
Remotely accessing the DSU/CSU through the Facility Data Link (FDL) or the
NOTE:
EDL is only available on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.
LAN
ROUTER
ETHERNET
DSU/CSU
NETWORK
PPP/SLIP
496-15006-01
Figure 2-4. Direct Connection
LAN
ROUTER
ETHERNET
DSU/CSU
P
aradyne
NETWORK
PPP/SLIP
496-15007-01
Figure 2-5. Connection through a Router
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Installation
LAN
ROUTER
DSU/CSU
ETHERNET
NETWORK
PPP
LAN
ADAPTER
496-15008-01
Figure 2-6. Connection through a LAN Adapter
DSU/CSU
PPP
PPP
DSU/CSU
DSU/CSU
NETWORK
LAN
ROUTER
ETHERNET
PPP
LAN
ADAPTER
496-15009-01
Figure 2-7. LAN Adapter and Daisy Chaining
LAN
DSU/CSU
DSU/CSU
ROUTER
ETHERNET
NETWORK
FDL/EDL
PPP
LAN
ADAPTER
496-15010-01
Figure 2-8. Remote Access through FDL/EDL
2-4
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Installation
Important Instructions
Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the DSU/CSU or
included in this guide.
For a complete listing of the safety instructions, see Important Safety Instructions
at the beginning of this guide.
!
HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR STATIC-SENSITIVE
DEVICES
This product is designed to protect sensitive components from damage
due to electrostatic discharge (ESD) during normal operation. When
performing installation procedures, however, take proper static control
precautions to prevent damage to equipment. If you are not sure of the
proper static control precautions, contact your nearest sales or service
representative.
496-15104
Optional Power Sources
The DSU/CSU is typically powered by the ac power module. Use the
following procedures only if you want to use an optional SELV (Safety Extra
Low Voltage) dc power source.
Using the optional dc power cable, the DSU/CSU is capable of operating on either
a +24 Vdc power source, –48 Vdc single source battery, or –48 Vdc redundant
source batteries (for power backup). To use dc power, choose one of the following
power supply types.
Installing the +24 Vdc Power Supply
+24 Vdc Power Supply Pinouts, and use the following procedure.
Procedure
To install the +24 Vdc power supply:
1. Connect the green wire to a suitable ground.
2. Connect the white wire to the +24 Vdc return.
3. Connect the orange wire to the +24 Vdc source.
4. Cut the black, red, and blue wires off at the outer insulation.
5. Plug the power connector into the DSU/CSU.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Installation
DSU/CSU POWER
PLUG
TO CUSTOMER-SUPPLIED BATTERY
BLACK
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
X
X
GREEN
WHITE
ORANGE
BLUE
GROUND
+24 VDC RETURN
+24 VDC SOURCE
X
99-14298-02
Figure 2-9. +24 Vdc Power Supply Pinouts
Installing the Single –48 Vdc Power Supply
To install the DSU/CSU using a single source –48 Vdc SELV power supply, refer to
procedure.
Procedure
To install the –48 Vdc single source power supply:
1. Connect the black and red wires to the –48 Vdc return source.
2. Connect the green wire to a suitable ground.
3. Connect the orange and blue wires to the – 48 Vdc input source.
4. Cut the white wire off at the outer insulation.
5. Plug the power connector into the DSU/CSU.
DSU/CSU POWER
PLUG
TO CUSTOMER-SUPPLIED BATTERY
BLACK
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
–48 VDC RETURN
GREEN
WHITE
ORANGE
BLUE
GROUND
X
–48 VDC INPUT
99-14299-02
Figure 2-10. –48 Vdc Single Source Power Supply Pinouts
2-6
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Installation
Installing the Redundant –48 Vdc Power Supply
To install the DSU/CSU using a redundant –48 Vdc SELV power supply, refer to
following procedure.
Procedure
To install the redundant –48 Vdc power supply:
1. Connect the black wire to the –48 Vdc return source B.
2. Connect the red wire to the –48 Vdc return source A.
3. Connect the green wire to a suitable ground.
4. Connect the orange wire to the –48 Vdc input source B.
5. Connect the blue wire to the –48 Vdc input source A.
6. Cut the white wire off at the outer insulation.
7. Plug the power connector into the DSU/CSU.
DSU/CSU POWER
PLUG
TO CUSTOMER-SUPPLIED BATTERY
–48 VDC RETURN B
–48 VDC RETURN A
GROUND
BLACK
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
GREEN
WHITE
ORANGE
BLUE
X
–48 VDC INPUT B
–48 VDC INPUT A
99-14300-02
Figure 2-11. –48 Vdc Redundant Source Power Supply Pinouts
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Installation
Cabling Examples
The DSU/CSU is supplied with an ac power module and a VF cable for the integral
modem.
Figure 2-12, Cabling Examples, illustrates some cabling examples.
OR
MODEM
PSTN
MODEM
OR
PC
TERMINAL
SNMP
MANAGER
MODEM
PORT
FRONT
PANEL
3164 DSU/CSU
COM
PORT
MODEM
PORT
NETWORK
PORT
AUX
3160
DSU/CSU
PORT
PORT
2
1
EXT CLK
DSX-1
POWER
COM
MODEM
NET
NETWORK
PORT
T1 NETWORK
NETWORK
PORT
COM PORT
COM PORT MODEM
NETWORK
POWER
AUX PORT
DTE
SERIAL
PORT
3164
DSU/CSU
POWER
NEC
CLASS
2
CAUTION:AUX PORT OR COM PORT MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO PSTN OR T1 NETWORK
INPUT
PORT
3
PORT
4
CLOCK IN
PORT
1
PORT
2
POWER
TO
ROUTER
OR
OR
T1 OR SERIAL CONNECTIONS
DIAL CONNECTIONS
SNMP
MANAGER
TERMINAL
99-16250
Figure 2-12. Cabling Examples
2-8
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Installation
Power-Up Self-Test
After you connect the DSU/CSU to a power source, the unit performs the power-up
self-test to ensure that it is in good working order. The DSU/CSU performs this test
on itself upon power-up or after a device reset, unless it has been disabled by the
The self-test includes a basic processor test, a limited memory test, a code
checksum test, and basic verification tests of the internal components. The front
panel LCD displays the progress and pass/fail status of these power-up tests.
The power-up self-test consists of the following steps:
1. Once the DSU/CSU is plugged in, the In Progress screen appears and the Fail
LED blinks ON and Off continuously.
Self-Test:
In Progress
F2
F3
F1
2. All the LEDs then start to flash simultaneously in the pattern twice ON, then
Off. Then, the LCD begins to flash characters and numbers in the same
pattern, alternating with the flashing LEDs.
3. If the self-test is successful, the Passed screen appears for one second, the
Fail LED turns Off and the OK LED lights.
Self-Test:
Passed
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Installation
If the self-test fails, the Failed screen appears for five seconds. The Fail LED
lights, and an eight-digit failure code (xxxxxxxx) is displayed for use by service
personnel to determine the cause of the self-test failure. The DSU/CSU
continues to try to operate. If you are in doubt about the results of the self-test,
use the Self-Test Health command to display the status of this test (see
Self-Test:
Failed xxxxxxxx
F2
F3
F1
4. The top-level menu screen appears.
DSU ESF
Stat Test Cnfig
F2
F3
F1
2-10
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
3
Overview
This chapter contains information for operating your DSU/CSU. It includes a
description of the front panel and sample procedures for configuring the
DSU/CSU.
NOTE:
Additional information for the carrier-mounted DSU/CSU is located in the
ACCULINK 3151 CSU and 3161 DSU/CSU General Information Guide and
the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual.
Using the Front Panel
The standalone DSU/CSU front panel (Figure 3-1, Standalone DSU/CSU Front
Panel) consists of an LCD, a keypad, test jacks, and 12 LEDs. The
carrier-mounted DSU/CSU faceplate contains test jacks and 12 LEDs, however,
the LCD and keypad are located on the Shared Diagnostic Control Panel (SDCP)
of the 3000 Series Carrier. For more information about the SDCP, refer to the
COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual.
NOTE:
You can display a graphical representation of the DSU/CSU front panel on an
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
LCD
ACCULINK
F1
F2
F3
MON EQPT
NET
In
In
In
OK FAIL TEST SIG OOF ALRM EER SIG OOF ALRM PDV BPV
NETWORK DTR TXD RXD CTS RTS
3160
Out
Out
Out
496-14936
Figure 3-1. Standalone DSU/CSU Front Panel
LCD
Messages such as alarms, command/test completion, and action in progress
F2
F3
F1
Figure 3-2. LCD
The LCD displays status messages as requested via the Device Health and Status
Maintenance). In addition, the highest level status message appears on the front
panel automatically if no front panel action has occurred at the DSU/CSU for the
past five minutes.
The LCD also lists commands, configuration options, and test results. In most
cases, the top line shows the command or option name and default value, while
the second line displays options and responses. When a response is required,
select from the options displayed directly above the Function keys (F1, F2, F3);
make your choice by pressing the corresponding Function key.
3-2
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Keypad
menu tree and select choices presented on the second line of the LCD.
F2
F3
F1
Figure 3-3. Keypad
Use the
key to move up the menu.
F2
F3
F1
Use the
key to exit any part of the menu in which you may be operating. You
immediately return to the top-level menu screen shown on the front panel menu
F2
F3
F1
Use the Function (F1, F2, F3) keys to make selections from the choices presented
on the second line of the LCD. When this line presents choices, it is generally
divided into three sections, each displayed directly above one of the Function keys.
When your choice appears above one of the Function keys, press that key to
select that choice.
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
The scroll keys (
and
) serve one of two functions, depending on whether a
menu screen or a data entry screen appears on the front panel.
For data entry screens, the
key scrolls one character to the left while the
key scrolls one character to the right.
For menu screens, the
key scrolls to the previous menu choice while the
key scrolls to the next menu choice.
F2
F3
F1
If a choice is available to the left of the screen, the character ← appears on the top
line. If a choice is available to the right of the screen, the → character appears on
the top line. If choices are available to both the right and the left of the screen, two
arrows appear (⇔ ). The arrows indicate that you must use the scroll keys to bring
the additional options onto the screen.
Test Jacks
Maintenance. (The 3165 provides only the Network Monitor In and Network
Monitor Out test jacks.)
NET
In
MON EQPT
In
In
Out
Out
Out
496-14808
Figure 3-4. Test Jacks (Standalone DSU/CSU)
3-4
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
LEDs
There are twelve LEDs on the DSU/CSU front panel. The five LEDs on the right
interface and the data ports. Refer to Selecting the DTE Drop/Insert or Data Port
NOTE:
The DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface is only available on 2-port and 4-port
DSU/CSUs.
OK FAIL TEST SIG OOF ALRM EER SIG OOF ALRM PDV BPV
NETWORK
DTR TXD RXD CTS RTS
493-14301
Figure 3-5. DSU/CSU LEDs
A green LED indicates normal operation. A yellow LED indicates a warning (for the
DTE Drop/Insert interface) or activity (for the data ports). Conditions are sampled
every tenth of a second.
The twelve front panel LEDs are grouped into four sections to indicate the status of
the:
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Table 3-1. System LEDs
Name
Color
Meaning
OK
Green
Indicates the current operational state of the DSU/CSU.
ON: The DSU/CSU is operational and has power.
OFF: The DSU/CSU is performing a power-up self-test or a
system failure has occurred.
BLINKING: A software download is in progress.
FAST BLINK: The carrier-mounted DSU/CSU is currently
selected by the SDCP.
FAIL
Yellow
Yellow
Indicates a system failure or a self-test.
ON: A device error/fault is detected or a reset has just occurred.
OFF: No system failures are detected.
BLINKING: A self-test is in progress.
TEST
A system test is in progress.
ON: A loopback or pattern test has been initiated either locally, by
the network, or externally.
OFF: No tests are active.
Table 3-2. Network Interface LEDs
Name
Color
Meaning
SIG
Green
Monitors the signal being received from the network.
ON: A recoverable signal is being received from the network.
OFF: The signal cannot be recovered from the network (a Loss of
Signal condition exists).
OOF
ALRM
EER
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Monitors Out Of Frame (OOF) conditions on the received
network signal.
ON: At least one OOF was detected on the signal during the
sampling period.
OFF: No OOFs were detected on the signal during the sampling
period.
Indicates whether an alarm condition exists on the received
network signal.
ON: An alarm condition (LOS, LOF, EER, Yellow, AIS) exists on
the received network signal. Use the Device Health and Status
command to determine the alarm type.
OFF: No alarm condition exists on the network interface signal.
Indicates the Excessive Error Rate (EER) has been exceeded on
the network interface.
NOTE: This LED is only valid when ESF framing is being used.
ON: The EER has been exceeded on the network interface.
OFF: The EER has not been exceeded on the network interface.
3-6
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
NOTE:
The DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface is only available on 2-port and 4-port
DSU/CSUs.
Table 3-3. DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Interface LEDs
Name
Color
Meaning
SIG
Green
Monitors the signal being received from the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface.
ON: A recoverable signal is being received from the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
OFF: The signal cannot be recovered from the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface (a Loss of Signal condition exists).
OOF
Yellow
Yellow
Monitors Out Of Frame (OOF) conditions on the received DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) signal.
ON: At least one OOF was detected on the signal during the
sampling period.
OFF: No OOFs were detected on the signal during the sampling
period.
ALRM
Indicates whether an alarm condition exists on the received DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) signal.
ON: An alarm condition (LOS, LOF, EER, Yellow, AIS) exists on
the received DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) signal. Use the Device
Health and Status command to determine the alarm type.
OFF: No alarm condition exists on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface signal.
PDV
Yellow
Yellow
Monitors Pulse Density Violations (PDV) on the received DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) signal.
ON: At least one PDV was detected (and corrected) on the
received DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) signal during the sampling
period.
OFF: No PDVs were detected on the received DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) signal during the sampling period.
BPV
Monitors Bipolar Violations (BPV) on the received DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) signal.
ON: At least one BPV was detected (and corrected) on the
received DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) signal during the sampling
period.
OFF: No BPVs were detected on the received DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) signal during the sampling period.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Table 3-4. Data Port LEDs
Name
Color
Meaning
DTR
Green
Monitors the state of interchange circuit CD (CCITT 108/1, /2) –
Data Terminal Ready received from the synchronous data DTE.
ON: DTR is being asserted by the synchronous data DTE.
OFF: DTR is not being asserted.
TXD
Yellow
Monitors activity on interchange circuit BA (CCITT 103) –
Transmitted Data. This is the data sent from the synchronous
data DTE to the data port on the DSU/CSU.
ON: Ones are being received from the synchronous data DTE.
OFF: Zeros are being received from the synchronous data DTE.
CYCLING: Both ones and zeros are being received from the
synchronous data DTE.
RXD
Yellow
Monitors activity on interchange circuit BB (CCITT 104) –
Received Data. This is data sent to the synchronous data DTE
from the data port on the DSU/CSU.
ON: Ones are being sent to the synchronous data DTE.
OFF: Zeros are being sent to the synchronous data DTE.
CYCLING: Both ones and zeros are being sent to the
synchronous data DTE.
CTS
RTS
Yellow
Yellow
Monitors the state of interchange circuit CB (CCITT 106) –
Clear-to-Send sent to the synchronous data DTE.
ON: CTS is being asserted by the DSU/CSU.
OFF: CTS is not being asserted.
Monitors the state of interchange circuit CA (CCITT 105) –
Request-to-Send received from the synchronous data DTE.
ON: RTS is being asserted by the synchronous data DTE.
OFF: RTS is not being asserted.
3-8
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
NOTE:
The following procedures are examples only. Screen displays may vary
depending on the model of the DSU/CSU.
Displaying Unit Identity
The identity of the DSU/CSU (serial number, model number, software revision
level, hardware revision level, and customer identification) is available through the
The customer identification is the only identity number you can change.
Procedure
To display the DSU/CSU’s identity (ID):
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Stat.
DSU ESF
Stat
Test
Cnfig
F2
F3
F1
2. From the Status screen, press the
screen.
key until the ID selection appears on the
3. Select ID.
Status:
TStat
LED
ID
F2
F3
F1
4. The following screens appear in the order listed each time you press the
key.
Identity:
Ser=xxxxxxx
F2
F3
F1
Identity:
Mod=xxxx-xx-xxx
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Identity:
Cust ID=xxxxxxxx
F2
F3
F3
F3
F3
F1
Identity:
SRev=xx.xx.xx
F2
F1
Identity:
CCA1=xxxx-xxx
F2
F1
Identity:
CCA2=xxxx-xxx
F2
F1
3-10
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Setting Customer Identification
The customer identification is the only identity number you can change. It is used
to uniquely identify the DSU/CSU.
Procedure
To change the customer identification (CID):
1. From the top-level menu, press the
the screen.
key until the Ctrl selection appears on
2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, press the
the screen.
key until the CID selection appears on
4. Select CID.
Control:
Reset
CID
Passwd
F2
F3
F1
5. Use the
and
keys to position the cursor under the desired character.
You must enter a character before the
to the right.
moves the cursor to the next space
CustID:xxxxxxxx
Up
Down
Save
F2
F3
F1
6. Enter the desired ID. Press F1 (Up) and F2 (Down) to scroll up and down
through the valid characters/numbers for the customer ID. Valid characters are
0 through 9, #, -, ., /, A to Z, and blank space. Press F3 (Save) to save the ID.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Selecting the DTE Drop/Insert or Data Port for LED Display
Use the LED command on the Control branch to select which port’s (DTE
Drop/Insert or data port) status appears on the five shared LEDs on the front
panel.
Procedure
To select a port for LED display:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.
key until the Ctrl selection
2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, select LED.
Control:
Call
Rel
LED
F2
F3
F1
The currently selected port name appears on the top line of the LCD. DTE
indicates the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) port.
LED Dsply: DTE
DTE
Prt1
Prt2
F2
F3
F1
4. From the LED Dsply screen, press the Function key that corresponds to the
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) or data port for which you want the LEDs to display.
Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
Select DTE to monitor the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) port’s SIG, OOF, ALRM,
PDV, and BPV status signals on the shared LEDs.
Select a particular data port to monitor the data port’s DTR, TXD, RXD, CTS,
and RTS control signals on the shared LEDs.
3-12
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Displaying LED Conditions
The same conditions monitored by the front panel LEDs can also be monitored by
the LED command. This command is most useful when the DSU/CSU is being
Panel Emulation, no LEDs are shown on the PC’s screen; you must use the Stat
command procedure described below to get LED information.
NOTE:
The following procedure is an example only. Screen displays may vary
depending on the model of the DSU/CSU.
Procedure
To display LED conditions on the front panel screen:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Stat.
2. From the Status screen, press the
the screen.
key until the LED selection appears on
3. From the Status screen, select LED.
Status:
Perf
TStat
LED
F2
F3
F1
4. From the Select LEDs screen, press the Function key that corresponds to T1
interface or the data port for which you want to display LEDs. Use the scroll
keys, if necessary.
Select LEDs:
T1
Prt1
Prt2
F2
F3
F1
If you chose T1, the LED Display screen lists the LED signals, two at a time,
on the second line. A vertical bar at the left of the LED name indicates the
condition is ON, while an underscore indicates the condition is Off.
LED Display:
_Test
_NetSig
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
If you chose a port, the Port n LEDs screen lists the LED signals, two at a time,
on the second line. A vertical bar at the left of the LED name indicates the
condition is ON, while an underscore indicates the condition is Off.
Port n LEDs:
_DTR
_TXD
F2
F3
F1
5. Use the
and
keys to scroll LED names onto the screen.
Changing Configuration Options
The DSU/CSU is an intelligent device that displays only valid options for the
current configuration. Therefore, you are only presented with menu choices that
are consistent with the current configuration and operational state of the
DSU/CSU; invalid combinations of configuration options do not appear. For
example, menus displayed for the Model 3160 (2 ports) and the Model 3164
(4 ports) differ due to the number of ports available. Also, if the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface selection is disabled, many of the menu choices do not appear.
Be aware that although all options are shown in this guide, what you see on your
DSU/CSU varies with your configuration.
The DSU/CSU offers configuration options located in the following memory areas:
Active (Activ) – This is the configuration option set currently active for the
DSU/CSU. Before a configuration option set becomes active for the DSU/CSU,
you must save the set to the Active area. When the DSU/CSU is shipped from
the factory, the Active configuration option set is identical to the Factory set.
This area can be written to and controls the current operation of the device.
Customer 1 (Cust1) – This is the first of two sets of customer-defined
configuration options. This area can be written to.
Customer 2 (Cust2) – This is the second of two sets of customer-defined
configuration options. This area can be written to.
Factory 1 (Fact1) – This is a set of configuration options preset at the factory.
This set is determined by what is considered to be the most common
configuration used in the DSU/CSU market. Factory 1 options are read-only.
Factory 2 (Fact2) – This is a set of configuration options preset at the factory.
This set is determined by what is considered to be the second most common
configuration used in the DSU/CSU market. Factory 2 options are read-only.
3-14
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
The configuration options are divided into functional groups. Appendix C,
Configuration Options, contains a list of the configuration options and defaults.
These groups are:
The DSU/CSU arrives with two preset factory default configuration settings. These
settings are based on the following:
Factory 1 – ESF framing format with B8ZS line coding format for both the
network and the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interfaces. Data ports are
unassigned.
Factory 2 – D4 framing format with AMI line coding format for both the
network and the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interfaces. Data ports are
unassigned.
If neither of the factory default settings support your network’s configuration, you
can customize the configuration options to better suit your application.
Use the Configuration (Cnfig) branch of the front panel menu tree to display or
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Displaying/Editing Configuration Options
Procedure
To display/edit configuration options:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
DSU ESF
Stat
Test
Cnfig
F2
F3
F1
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
Load from:
Activ
Cust1
F2
F3
F1
3. Select Edit.
Choose Funct:
Edit
Save
F2
F3
F1
4. From the Edit screen, select the functional group you want to edit by pressing
the appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary. (The NET
selection is shown as an example only.)
Edit:
DTE
Port
NET
F2
F3
F1
The configuration options for the selected functional group appear on the front
panel one option at a time. The option name appears on Line 1 with the
current value next to it. To reach other options, use the Next and Previous
selections to scroll forward and backward through the group of options.
3-16
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
NET Framing: ESF
Next
D4
ESF
F2
F3
F1
5. Press the appropriate Function key to choose another value. Use the scroll
keys, if necessary.
6. Use the Save procedure to save your changes to the Active or Customer area.
Saving Edit Changes
Save edit changes to the Active area when you want those changes to take effect
immediately. Save edit changes to the Customer area when you want to overwrite
the existing Customer configuration options and store these changes for future
use.
NOTE:
If you attempt to exit the Edit function after making changes without performing
a Save, the DSU/CSU prompts you with Save Options?Choose Yes or No.
Procedure
To save edit changes:
1. From the Choose Funct screen (one level above the Edit screen, two levels
below the top-level menu screen), select Save.
Choose Funct:
Edit
Save
F2
F3
F1
2. Choose whether you want to save to the Active, Customer 1, or Customer 2
area. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
Save Edit to:
Activ
Cust1
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Selecting/Copying to a Specific Port
For the DSU/CSU, you have the capability of selecting a specific port to configure,
and then (for 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs) copying the configuration options from
that port to another port (or to all ports).
NOTE:
The following procedure is an example only. Screen displays may vary
depending on the model and configuration of the DSU/CSU.
Procedure
To select a specific port to configure:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, select Port.
Edit:
DTE
Port
NET
F2
F3
F1
5. From the Port Select screen, press the Function key that corresponds to the
port you want to configure. Use the key to scroll addition ports onto the
Options).
Port Select:
Copy
Prt1
Prt2
F2
F3
F1
3-18
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Procedure
To copy the configuration options to one or all ports:
1. From the Port Select screen, select Copy.
Port Select:
Copy
Prt1
Prt2
F2
F3
F1
2. Select the port from which you want to copy the configuration options using
the corresponding Function key.
Copy From:
Prt1
Prt2
Prt3
F2
F3
F1
3. Select the port to which you want to copy the configuration options using the
corresponding Function key. Or, press F1 (All) to choose to copy to all ports.
Copy To:
All
Prt1
Prt2
F2
F3
F1
Configuring the DSU/CSU for SNMP or Telnet Access
To configure the DSU/CSU for SNMP or Telnet access:
Enable the SNMP agent or Telnet server within the DSU/CSU (see
Select and configure the port that provides the link to the SNMP or Telnet
system.
Set the Internet Protocol (IP) address and subnet mask needed to access the
Select the link layer protocol (PPP or SLIP) for the port that provides the link to
the SNMP or Telnet system.
For SNMP links, specify the two community names (and their access levels)
that are allowed to access the device’s Management Information Base (MIB).
For SNMP links, configure the device to send traps to the SNMP manager, if
desired.
Specify the Telnet password or SNMP validation options, if desired (see
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Selecting the Port
The SNMP manager, Telnet device, or network device (e.g., a router) can be
directly connected to the communications (COM) port. An external LAN Adapter
can be connected to either the COM port or the auxiliary (AUX) port to provide
Ethernet or Token Ring connectivity. Also, the DSU/CSU can be daisy chained
together by connecting the COM port of one device to the AUX port of the other,
providing SNMP or Telnet connectivity. Use the MODEM port when accessing the
DSU/CSU through a dial-up connection.
The COM port can support either synchronous or asynchronous PPP, or
asynchronous SLIP at data rates of up to 38,400 bps. The AUX port can support
data rates up to 38,400 bps. The MODEM port can support either synchronous or
asynchronous PPP, or asynchronous SLIP at data rates of up to 2400 bps.
The example shown below assumes that the COM port is being used as the link to
the SNMP or Telnet system.
Procedure
To select the COM port as the SNMP or Telnet link:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
screen.
key until the User selection appears on the
5. Select User.
Edit:
Chan
Gen
User
F2
F3
F1
6. Press F1 (Next) until the Com Use configuration option appears.
7. Select Mgmt to configure the COM port as the SNMP or Telnet link.
Com Use:
Next
Mgmt
ASCII
F2
F3
F1
3-20
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Setting the IP Address
The IP address is the address used by the SNMP or Telnet system to access the
using PPP, the IP address can be negotiated if the network device (e.g., router or
SNMP manager) supports such negotiation. The IP address is composed of four
fields with three digits per field (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx).
The IP address is set for the MODEM port, the COM port, or the AUX port (with
LAN Adapter or daisy chain), depending on which one has been chosen as the
SNMP or Telnet communication link. The example below assumes that an IP
address of 010.155.111.222 is being set for the COM port. You can use the same
principles to assign any value (between 000 and 255 for each digit field) to other
ports.
Procedure
To assign an IP address to the COM port:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.
key until the Mgmt selection appears on
5. Select Mgmt.
Edit:
User
Alarm Mgmt
F2
F3
F1
6. From the Mgmt Config screen, select Gen.
Mgmt Config:
Gen
Trap
F2
F3
F1
7. Press F1 (Next) until the Com IP Adr configuration option appears.
NOTE:
Steps 8 and 9 describe the process for entering an IP address. This
process applies to any IP address.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
8. Press F2 (Edit) to edit the IP address. You have the option of using F3 (Clear)
to reset the IP address to the factory default 000.000.000.000.
Com IP Adr:
Next
Edit
Clear
F2
F3
F1
9. Use the
and
keys to position the cursor under the digit you want to
change. Press F1 (Up) to increment the digit or F2 (Down) to decrement the
digit. In this example, you would press once to place the cursor under the
middle digit in the first digit field, then press F1 (Up) once to change the 0 to
a 1. Continue in this manner to change the other digits.
000.000.000.000
Up
Down
Save
F2
F3
F1
10. When you are through changing the IP address, you must press F3 (Save) to
save the value. Otherwise, the original value will be retained.
010.155.111.222
Up
Down
Save
F2
F3
F1
3-22
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Selecting the Link Layer Protocol
Two link layer protocols, Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) and Serial Line Internet
Protocol (SLIP), are supported for connection to an external SNMP manager,
Telnet device, or network device (e.g., a router). PPP can be used for synchronous
or asynchronous operation. SLIP can be used for asynchronous operation only.
NOTE:
The carrier-mounted DSU/CSU does not support synchronous operation on
the COM port.
The standalone DSU/CSU implementation of PPP supports the following:
Full negotiation of PPP’s Link Control Protocol (LCP).
Active negotiation of LCP when the connection is established.
Maximum Request Unit (MRU) sizes up to 1500 bytes, but the DSU/CSU will
attempt to negotiate down to 500 bytes.
The DSU/CSU provides a unique LCP magic number derived from the unit
serial number and the elapsed time.
Full negotiation of escape characters.
The DSU/CSU implementation of PPP does not support Link Quality Reports
(LQR), compression, encryption, Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) or
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP).
The DSU/CSU implementation of SLIP supports a fixed MRU size of 1006 bytes.
Before selecting the protocol, you must first select the port to be used as the
assumes that the COM port is being used as the communications link.
Procedure
To select the link layer protocol:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.
key until the Mgmt selection appears on
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
5. Select Mgmt.
Edit:
User
Alarm
Mgmt
F2
F3
F1
6. From the Mgmt Config screen, select Gen.
Mgmt Config:
Gen
Trap
F2
F3
F1
7. Press F1 (Next) until the Com Link configuration option appears.
8. Press F2 (PPP) or F3 (SLIP).
Com Link:
Next
PPP
SLIP
F2
F3
F1
Specifying the Community Name(s) and Access Type(s)
You have the capability of specifying up to two community names (community
name 1 and community name 2) to be used by external SNMP managers when
trying to access objects in the DSU/CSU’s MIB. Once you specify the community
name(s), you must then specify the type of access to the MIB that SNMP
managers in the community are permitted to have.
Procedure
To specify the community name 1 and its access type:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.
key until the Mgmt selection appears on
3-24
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
5. Select Mgmt.
Edit:
User
Alarm Mgmt
F2
F3
F1
6. From the Mgmt Config screen, select Gen.
Mgmt Config:
Gen
Trap
F2
F3
F1
7. Press F1 (Next) until the CommunityName1 configuration option appears.
8. Press F2 (Edit) to edit the community name.
CommunityName1:
Next
Edit
Clear
F2
F3
F1
NOTE:
Steps 9 and 10 describe the process for entering text strings for Mgmt
configuration options. This process applies to entering any text strings into
Mgmt configuration options.
9. Use the
and
keys to position the cursor under the character you want
to change. Press F1 (Up) or F2 (Down) to scroll through the valid
numbers/characters for the text string.
public
Up
Down
Save
F2
F3
F1
The F1 (Up) key scrolls through the ASCII character set in the following order:
numbers (0–9), lowercase letters (a–z), uppercase letters (A–Z), space
character, ASCII symbols (ascending order, based on ASCII code), and the
End of Line symbol (← ) The ← erases all characters to the right of the cursor.
10. When you are through changing the community name, you must press F3
(Save) to save the value. Otherwise, the original value will be retained.
11. Press F1 (Next) until the Access 1 configuration option appears.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
12. Press F2 (Read) or F3 (R/W).
Access 1:
Next
Read
R/W
F2
F3
F1
The Read selection allows read-only access (SNMP “Get”) to the accessible
objects in the MIB when community name 1 is used. The R/W selection allows
Read/Write access (SNMP “Get” and “Set”) to the objects in the MIB. Write
access is allowed for all objects specified as read/write in the MIB. Read
access is allowed for all objects specified as read-only or read/write.
Configuring SNMP Traps
A trap is an unsolicited message that is sent from the DSU/CSU to an SNMP
manager when the DSU/CSU detects certain pre-specified conditions. These
traps enable the SNMP manager to monitor the state of the network.
The SNMP Trap configuration option must be enabled for trap messages to be
sent over the communications link. You must specify the number of SNMP
managers that are to receive traps from this DSU/CSU, an IP address for each
SNMP manager specified, and the type of traps to be sent from this DSU/CSU. For
Enabling SNMP Trap Messages
Procedure
To enable SNMP trap messages from this DSU/CSU:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.
key until the Alarm selection appears on
5. Select Alarm.
Edit:
User
Alarm
Mgmt
F2
F3
F1
6. Press F1 (Next) until the SNMP Trap configuration option appears.
3-26
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
7. Press F2 (Enab) to enable trap messages over the SNMP management link.
SNMP Trap:
Next
Enab
Disab
F2
F3
F1
Selecting the Number of Trap Managers
If you intend to issue traps to an SNMP manager(s) from this device, you must
specify the number of SNMP managers that are to receive the traps.
Procedure
To specify the number of SNMP managers to receive traps from this device:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.
key until the Mgmt selection appears on
5. Select Mgmt.
Edit:
User
Alarm
Mgmt
F2
F3
F1
6. From the Mgmt Config screen, select Trap.
Mgmt Config:
Gen
Trap
F2
F3
F1
7. Select the number of SNMP managers to receive traps (from 1 through 6) by
using the appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
Num Trap Mgrs:1
Next
1
2
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Configuring a Destination for SNMP Traps
A destination must be configured for each SNMP trap manager specified. This
configuration option is displayed for the number of trap managers specified by the
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.
Procedure
To configure an IP address for the SNMP trap manager:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.
key until the Mgmt selection appears on
5. Select Mgmt.
Edit:
User
Alarm Mgmt
F2
F3
F1
6. From the Mgmt Config screen, select Trap.
Mgmt Config:
Gen
Trap
F2
F3
F1
7. Press F1 (Next) until the Trapn IP Address configuration option appears.
8. Press F2 (Edit) to edit the IP address. You have the option of using F3 (Clear)
9. Press F1 (Next) until the Trapn Destination configuration appears, and select
the destination for the SNMP trap by using the appropriate Function key. Use
the scroll keys, if necessary.
Trapn Dst:
Next
None
Com
F2
F3
F1
3-28
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Configuring DS0 Channels
The DSU/CSU provides channel configuration options that allow you to do the
following:
Display the DS0 assignments for the network, DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1), and
data port interfaces.
Allocate DS0 channels on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface to the
network interface.
Allocate DS0 channels on the network or DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface to
particular data ports.
Clear (deallocate) all DS0 channels from the network, DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1), or data port interface.
Map data from one port to another.
To allocate DS0 channels, begin by defining the logical channel configuration for
the network interface, and then the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, and then
example of a conceptual diagram of a channel configuration.
Blank configuration worksheets are provided at the back of Appendix C,
allocation:
1. Complete the Network Interface and the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Interface
tables (unless the DTE Drop/Insert interface is disabled) as shown in the
2. Complete the Robbed Bit Signaling (RBS) information worksheet as shown in
Worksheet (Ports 3 and 4), circle the configuration options needed to
implement the logical channel configuration.
Once you have completed the worksheets, enter this information using the
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
DTE DROP/INSERT
(DSX-1) INTERFACE
D1
D2
NETWORK
INTERFACE
D3
N1
D4
N2
D5
N3
D6
N4
D7
N5
D8
N6
D9
N7
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
N8
N9
N10
N11
N12
N13
N14
N15
N16
N17
N18
N19
N20
N21
N22
N23
N24
PORTS
PRT 1
PRT 2
PRT 3
PRT 4
496-14907-01
Figure 3-6. Example of Channel Allocation
3-30
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Network Interface
Network Channel
Allocation
N1
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9
D9
N10
N11
N12
N13
N14
N15
N16
N17
N18
N19
N20
N21
N22
N23
N24
Allocations:
D10
D11
D12
D15
Prt1
Prt1
Prt1
Prt3
Prt2
Prt2
Prt2
Prt2
Prt2
Prt2
Prt3
D1 – D24 indicates allocation to DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) channels.
Prt1 – Prt4 indicates allocation to synchronous data ports.
Figure 3-7. Example of Interface Worksheet for Network Interface
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Interface
DTE (DSX-1) Channel
Allocation
D1
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
N9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
Allocations:
N10
N11
N12
N13
N1 – N24 indicates allocation to network channels.
Figure 3-8. Example of Interface Worksheet for DTE Drop/Insert Interface
3-32
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
DTE Chan Config
Assign: (N1 – 24)
Voice (RBS or Data)
D1
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
RBS
RBS
RBS
RBS
Data
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
N9
RBS
RBS
Data
Data
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
N10
N11
N12
N13
Data
Figure 3-9. Example of RBS Information Worksheet
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Port Chan
Conf
Options
Value
Assign To
Assign By
NET, DTE, Prt2, Prt3, Prt4
Block, ACAMI, Chan
Port Rate
Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704,
768, 832, 896, 960, 1024, 1088, 1152, 1216, 1280, 1344, 1408,
1472, 1536
Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616,
672, 728, 784, 840, 896, 952, 1008, 1064, 1120, 1176, 1232,
1288, 1344
If Assign By Block
Start At
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select One)
Port 1
Port Rate
Start At
Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768
Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616, 672
If Assign By ACAMI
If Assign By Chan
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23
(Select One)
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select Multiple)
Assign To
Assign By
NET, DTE, Prt1, Prt3, Prt4
Block, ACAMI, Chan
Port Rate
Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704,
768, 832, 896, 960, 1024, 1088, 1152, 1216, 1280, 1344, 1408,
1472, 1536
Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616,
672, 728, 784, 840, 896, 952, 1008, 1064, 1120, 1176, 1232,
1288, 1344
If Assign By Block
Start At
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select One)
Port 2
Port Rate
Start At
Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768
Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616, 672
If Assign By ACAMI
If Assign By Chan
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23
(Select One)
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select Multiple)
Figure 3-10. Port Channel Configuration Worksheet (Ports 1 and 2)
3-34
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Port Chan
Conf
Options
Value
Assign To
Assign By
NET, DTE, Prt1, Prt2, Prt4
Block, ACAMI, Chan
Port Rate
Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704,
768, 832, 896, 960, 1024, 1088, 1152, 1216, 1280, 1344, 1408,
1472, 1536
Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616,
672, 728, 784, 840, 896, 952, 1008, 1064, 1120, 1176, 1232,
1288, 1344
If Assign By Block
Start At
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select One)
Port 3
Port Rate
Start At
Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768
Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616, 672
If Assign By ACAMI
If Assign By Chan
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23
(Select One)
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select Multiple)
Assign To
Assign By
NET, DTE, Prt1, Prt2, Prt3
Block, ACAMI, Chan
Port Rate
Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704,
768, 832, 896, 960, 1024, 1088, 1152, 1216, 1280, 1344, 1408,
1472, 1536
Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616,
672, 728, 784, 840, 896, 952, 1008, 1064, 1120, 1176, 1232,
1288, 1344
If Assign By Block
Start At
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select One)
Port 4
Port Rate
Start At
Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768
Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616, 672
If Assign By ACAMI
If Assign By Chan
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23
(Select One)
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select Multiple)
Figure 3-11. Port Channel Configuration Worksheet (Ports 3 and 4)
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
NOTE:
The following procedures are examples only. Screen displays may vary
depending on the model and configuration of the DSU/CSU.
Displaying DS0 Channel Assignments
Use the Display command (in the Channel Configuration branch) to view how the
DS0 channels are currently allocated.
Line 1 of the display shows the 24 channels of the selected interface. Pressing the
or
key scrolls the channels onto the screen in groups of three. Line 2
displays what is allocated to the DS0 channel listed in Line 1. Symbols used in the
Table 3-5. Display Channel Symbols
Symbol
–
Meaning
The DS0 channel is not allocated.
The DS0 channel is allocated to Port n, where n is 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Prtn
Nn
The DS0 channel is allocated to the network interface DS0 channel n,
where n can be any number from 1 through 24.
Dn
The DS0 channel is allocated to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface
DS0 channel n, where n can be any number from 1 through 24.
Procedure
To display the DS0 channel allocation:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.
key until the Chan selection appears on
5. Select Chan.
Edit:
Port
NET
Chan
F2
F3
F1
3-36
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
6. From the Channel Config screen, select Dsply.
Channel Config:
Dsply
Clear
DTE
F2
F3
F1
7. From the Display Chan screen, select NET to display the channels allocated to
the network interface. Or, select DTE to display the channels allocated to the
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Display Chan:
NET
DTE
Ports
F2
F3
F1
8. If you selected NET the channels allocated to the network interface are
displayed. Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the network interface, while Line
2 displays what is allocated to the DS0 channel shown in Line 1. Pressing the
or
key scrolls the channels onto the screen in groups of three.
N1
D2
N2
D3
N3
Prt1
F2
F3
F1
If you selected DTE, the channels allocated to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface are displayed. Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, while Line 2 displays what is allocated to the
DS0 channel shown in Line 1.
D1
–
D2
N1
D3
N2
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Allocating Data Ports
By using the configuration options, assign a specific port to DS0 channels on
either the network interface or the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. The
following methods are available to assign DS0 channels to the port:
Block – Allows a block of contiguous channels to be assigned by specifying a
data port rate and an initial DS0 channel (the first DS0 channel in a block of
DS0 channels). The number of channels assigned is determined by the port
rate. Only those initial DS0 channel numbers that provide enough bandwidth
(based on the port’s data rate) are displayed on the screen. These channels
are automatically assigned to the destination T1 interface (Network or DTE
Drop/Insert) when the initial DS0 channel is selected.
ACAMI (Alternate Channel Alternate Block Inversion) – Allows a block of
contiguous channels to be assigned by specifying a data port rate and an
initial DS0 channel (the first DS0 channel in a block of DS0 channels).
However, with ACAMI, the number of channels assigned is twice the number
needed for the port rate. This is because with ACAMI, every alternate DS0
channel (starting with the n+1 DS0 channel), does not carry data from the
port, but instead always transmits and receives all ones.
Chan (Channel) – Individually selects the DS0 channels to allocate to the
data port. The data port rate is automatically determined based on the number
of channels selected.
Once a port is selected, you have access to the configuration options to complete
the port allocation procedure. These configuration options enable you to,
Assign the selected port to the desired interface.
Select the desired method for channel allocation.
Select the port rate and starting channel (if the allocation method is block or
ACAMI).
Select the specific channels (if the allocation method is by individual channel).
3-38
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Procedure
To select the data port:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.
key until the Chan selection appears on
5. Select Chan.
Edit:DTE
Port
NET
Chan
F2
F3
F1
6. From the Channel Config screen, press the
screen.
key to scroll the ports onto the
7. Select the desired port by pressing its corresponding Function key.
Channel Config:
Prt1
Prt2
Prt3
F2
F3
F1
8. The configuration option for the data port channel allocation destination
appears on the screen. Select NET to assign this port to the network interface,
select DTE to assign this port to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, or
press the
key and the appropriate Function key to assign this port to
another port.
Assign To:NET
Next
NET
DTE
F2
F3
F1
9. Press F1 (Next) to display the appropriate configuration options on the screen.
Use one of the following examples, depending on whether you are assigning
by block, ACAMI, or individual channel.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Block or ACAMI Assignment Method
The Assign By configuration option screen appears after you select a port.
Procedure
To assign by the block or ACAMI method:
1. Press F2 for Block or F3 for ACAMI.
Assign By:
Next
Block ACAMI
F2
F3
F1
or
Assign By:
Next
Block ACAMI
F2
F3
F1
2. Press F1 (Next) to display the next configuration option (Port Rate).
3. Use the or key to scroll the desired port rate onto the screen. Rates
scroll in groups of three. Available selections depend on the current base rate
selected for the port. Press the corresponding Function key to select the port
rate. Then, select Next to display the Start At configuration option on the
screen.
Port Rate:384
Next
64
128
F2
F3
F1
NOTE:
For port-to-port mapping, the procedure is complete after the port rate is
selected.
3-40
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
4. The Start At screen displays the configuration option used to select the
starting DS0 channel. If the destination selected is the network interface, then
the network channels appear on the screen. If the destination selected is the
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, then these channels appear on the
screen.
The following screen shows an example for the network interface. Use the
or
key to scroll the desired channel onto the screen. Use the Function keys
to select the starting channel. Only those DS0 channel numbers that provide
enough bandwidth (based on the configured data rate) to be used as a starting
channel number are displayed. Channel allocation for this port can only be
cleared by selecting Clear.
Start At:Clear
Next
Clear
N1
F2
F3
F1
Individual Channel Assignment Method
The Assign By configuration option screen appears after you select a port.
Procedure
To assign by the individual channel method:
1. Press the
key once to bring the Chan selection onto the screen.
Assign By:Block
Next
Block ACAMI
F2
F3
F1
2. Press F3 (Chan).
Assign By:Chan
Block
ACAMI Chan
F2
F3
F1
3. Press F1 (Next) to display the next configuration option (channel allocation).
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
4. Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the network interface or the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, depending on which destination was chosen.
This example assumes that the network is the destination. Line 2 displays
what is allocated to the DS0 channel shown in Line 1. Pressing the
or
key scrolls the channels onto the screen in groups of three. Select the channel
by pressing the Function key under the desired number. Portn appears. The
port is assigned to that channel. To deallocate a port, press the Function key
under that port number. Pressing the Function key under channels assigned to
other ports has no effect.
N1
N2
Next
Prt1
Prt2
F2
F3
F1
Allocating DS0 Channels from the DTE Drop/Insert Interface to the Network Interface
By using the configuration options, you can allocate DS0 channels from the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface to the network interface and specify which DS0
channels carry Robbed Bit Signaling (RBS) information for voice channels.
Procedure
To allocate DS0 channels from the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface to the
network interface:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.
key until the Chan selection appears on
5. Select Chan.
Edit:
Port
NET
Chan
F2
F3
F1
6. From the Channel Config screen, select DTE.
Channel Config:
Dsply
Clear
DTE
F2
F3
F1
3-42
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
7. From the DTE Channels screen, press F1 to select Assign.
DTE Channels:
Assign
Voice
F2
F3
F1
8. Press the Function key below the network channel desired. Each time that you
press the Function key, the DTE channel number will scroll up one number. If
the network channel is currently unassigned (‘‘–” is displayed on Line 2), the
DTE channel number initially displays the same number as the corresponding
network channel number. However, if the network channel is currently
assigned, the DTE channel number is shown as Dn. Pressing the Function key
for D24 wraps the display back to D1. Only those channels that are not already
assigned will appear on the LCD when scrolling. The network channels
assigned to ports (Prt1...Prt4) are unavailable for assignment.
N1
D1
N2
D2
N3
–
F2
F3
F1
Procedure
To specify DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) channels used to carry voice information,
1. Press
screen.
from the channel allocation screen to return to the DTE Channels
N1
D1
N2
D2
N3
–
F2
F3
F1
2. From the DTE Channels screen, press F2 to select Voice.
DTE Channels:
Assign Voice
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
3. Line 1 displays the 24 DS0 channels for the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface. Pressing the or key scrolls the channels onto the screen in
groups of three. Line 2 displays whether the DS0 channel in Line 1 is a data
channel (Data) or a voice (RBS) channel. Each time that you press the
Function key located below the desired channel, the display in Line 2 toggles
between Data and RBS.
D1
D2
D3
RBS
RBS
RBS
F2
F3
F1
Clearing DS0 Channel Allocation
You can clear (deallocate) all the DS0 channels currently allocated to either the
network interface, the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, or the synchronous data
ports.
Procedure
To clear DS0 channel allocation:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.
key until the Chan selection appears on
5. Select Chan.
Edit:
Port
NET
Chan
F2
F3
F1
6. From the Channel Config screen, select Clear.
Channel Config:
Dsply
Clear
DTE
F2
F3
F1
3-44
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
7. From the Clear Channel screen, select NET to clear all DS0 channels
assigned to the network interface. Or, select DTE to clear all DS0 channels
assigned to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. Or, select a port to clear all
assignments for that data port.
Clear Channel:
NET
DTE
Port1
F2
F3
F1
Providing Backup Capability
If the T1 network fails, the DSU/CSU provides the ability to reconfigure the unit
and restore (at least partially) priority data circuits through an external backup
device.
You can store backup configuration options in the Customer 2 set of
customer-defined configuration options. The Enterprise MIB variable
devConfigAreaCopy allows the entire contents of one configuration area to be
copied into another configuration area via SNMP.
By cross-connecting two synchronous data ports to each other, one port can
provide a backup path for the other. As soon as the ports are configured to be
mapped to each other, Data Set Ready (DSR) for the ports is turned on. The
external backup device can be configured to initiate dialing when it detects the
off-to-on transition of DSR.
Selecting the Timing Source
The DSU/CSU provides the ability to select a master clock (timing) source that is
used to synchronize all of the T1 and data port interfaces on the DSU/CSU. The
clock for each interface is at the appropriate rate for that interface
(e.g., 1.544 Mbps for the T1 interfaces, the configured port rate for the data ports),
and it is independent of the master clock rate. This means that the master clock
rate and the DSU/CSU interface rates may be different.
The clock source configuration options enable you to select either the network
interface, a synchronous data port, the internal clock, the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface, or an external clock. If external clocking is selected, you must
use the clock rate configuration option to specify the clock rate. Figure 3-12,
Common Clocking Configurations, shows some common clocking configurations.
Two sample procedures for configuring timing are given in the following sections,
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
NOTE:
The external clock source is only available for 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.
For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, the external clock provides timing for up to
eight slots in the carrier. Each Auxiliary Backplane must have its own external
clock input.
NETWORK
CLOCK: NETWORK
CLOCK: NETWORK
CLOCK: INTERNAL
CLOCK: NETWORK
CLOCK: EXTERNAL
CLOCK: NETWORK
CLOCK: NETWORK
CLOCK: NETWORK
PBX
CLOCK: DTE (G.703) CONNECTOR
TERMINAL
EQUIPMENT
CLOCK: PORT 1, 2, 3, OR 4
496-14341-03
Figure 3-12. Common Clocking Configurations
3-46
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Configuring for Network Timing
Procedure
To configure for network timing:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
screen.
key until the Gen selection appears on the
5. Select Gen.
Edit:
NET
Chan
Gen
F2
F3
F1
6. Press F1 (Next) to display the next configuration option (Clock Src).
7. Select the master clock source. For network, press F2 (note that network is
also the default).
Clock Src:NET
Next
NET
DTE
F2
F3
F1
Configuring for External Timing
Procedure
To configure 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs for external timing:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
screen.
key until the Gen selection appears on the
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
5. Select Gen.
Edit:
NET
Chan
Gen
F2
F3
F1
6. Press F1 (Next) to display the next configuration option (Clock Src).
7. Select the master clock source. For external, press the
selection appears on the screen.
key until the Ext
8. Select Ext (external timing).
Clock Src:Ext
Prt1
Int
Ext
F2
F3
F1
9. Select the appropriate external clock rate by pressing the corresponding
Function key. This step is mandatory if you have chosen external clocking.
Clock Rate:1544
Next
2048
1544
F2
F3
F1
Establishing Access Security on a Port
Although the password feature is available, it is not required as a factory default. If
used, it ensures access security before device control is passed to a device
connected to a port. The password configuration option can be individually set for
the COM or MODEM port, or both if security is needed on both port types. The
default is None. The password itself is set separately (refer to the following
Procedure
To establish access security on a port:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
screen.
key until the User selection appears on the
3-48
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
5. Select User.
Edit:
Chan
Gen
User
F2
F3
F1
6. Press F1 (Next) until the Password configuration option appears.
7. Select port(s) to receive access security (None, Com, Modem, or Both). Use
the scroll keys, if necessary.
Password:None
Next
None
Com
F2
F3
F1
Setting a Password
In addition to establishing access security on a port (refer to the previous section,
Unless you specify otherwise, the password is null.
Procedure
To set a password:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.
key until the Ctrl selection
2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, press the
on the screen.
key until the Passwd selection appears
4. Select Passwd.
Control:
Reset
CID
Passwd
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
5. Use the
and
keys to position the cursor under the desired character.
You must enter a character before the
to the right.
moves the cursor to the next space
Passwd: xxxxxxxx
Up
Down
Save
F2
F3
F1
6. Enter the desired password. Press F1 (Up) and F2 (Down) to scroll up and
down through the valid characters/numbers for the password. Valid password
characters are 0-9, a-z, A-Z, #, -, ., and /. Press F3 (Save) to save the
password.
Passwd: xxxxxxxx
Up
Down
Save
F2
F3
F1
Entering a Password to Gain Access
You are prompted to enter a password (up to 8 characters) when you are
accessing a port whose Password configuration option is set (refer to the previous
Valid password characters are 0-9, a-z, A-Z, #, -, ., and /. The existing password is
not shown on the screen. An underscore in the first position shows where to enter
the first character. If the password is set to all null characters (default value), press
F3 (Done) when the password screen first appears.
The following screen appears when you access a DSU/CSU that has a password
enabled.
Passwd:_
Up
Down
Done
F2
F3
F1
3-50
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Procedure
To enter a password:
1. Use the
and
keys to position the cursor under the desired character.
You must enter a character before the
key moves the cursor to the next
space to the right. The key is not destructive.
Passwd:xxxxxxxx
Up
Down
Done
F2
F3
F1
2. Enter the required password. Press F1 (Up) and F2 (Down) to scroll up and
down through the valid characters/numbers for the password. You have five
minutes to enter the correct password before the DSU/CSU ends the session.
3. Press F3 (Done) to indicate you are done entering the password. If you enter
an invalid password, the message Invalid Passwordappears.
Acquiring/Releasing the User Interface
You can access the user interface from either the front panel, the COM port, the
MODEM port (for standalone DSU/CSUs), or the SDCP (for carrier-mounted
DSU/CSUs). The DSU/CSU allows only one user interface to be active at a time.
The front panel is the default user interface at power-up or after a reset. It is also
the default during a software download or when a failure occurs at either the local
or remote PC interface.
You can switch an inactive user interface to active if:
The current active user interface has had no activity (no key was pressed) for
at least five minutes.
The active user interface has been released with the Release command.
The active interface connection is broken. This includes the call disconnect for
a modem interface or the termination of the front panel emulation program on
a locally-attached PC (if the PC supports DTR) or the termination of the async
terminal interface on a remote or locally attached terminal.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Acquiring the Active User Interface
To acquire the active user interface, press any key. If you are using the PC
interface, use the mouse to click on the desired Function key.
The top-level menu screen appears on the active user interface, regardless of
what screen was displayed at the previous active user interface.
DSU ESF
Stat
Test
Cnfig
F2
F3
F1
The inactive interface displays the following message when a Function key is
pressed or a connection is made on the inactive user interface and control cannot
be switched because the currently active interface is in use. On the screen, either
Ft. Panel (front panel), Com Port, Modem, or SDCP is displayed in the user
interface (User I/F) field.
DSU ESF
User I/F active
F2
F3
F1
The inactive interface displays the following message after control has been
released from the previously active interface and another interface has not
become active.
DSU ESF
User I/F idle
F2
F3
F1
3-52
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Releasing the Active User Interface
To release the current active user interface, either allow five minutes to elapse
without pressing any key or use the Release command.
Procedure
To use the Release command:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.
key until the Ctrl selection
2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, select Rel (Release).
Control:
Call
Rel
LED
F2
F3
F1
The active user interface is released. The message Releasedappears. No
user interface is active until input is received from a user interface.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Enabling/Disabling the Front Panel
You can enable or disable the display of information on the front panel. This feature
is useful for ensuring that other users do not inadvertently change the device’s
configuration options while you are using an external device (e.g., a PC or async
terminal). The factory default is Enable.
NOTE:
If you disable the front panel, be sure not to alter the configuration options for
using an external device (e.g., a PC or async terminal). If this happens, you
lose the ability to communicate with the device. You will need to contact your
service representative.
Procedure
To enable or disable the front panel:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
the screen.
key until the User selection appears on
5. Select User.
6. Press F1 (Next) until the FP Access configuration option appears.
7. Press F2 to enable the front panel or F3 to disable the front panel.
FP Access:
Next
Enab
Disab
F2
F3
F1
3-54
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Using the Integral Modem in Standalone DSU/CSUs
The standalone DSU/CSU’s integral modem enables your DSU/CSU to
communicate with remote devices to display alarm messages or to function as the
user interface. The carrier-mounted DSU/CSU does not have an integral
modem.
The Call command, available from the Control branch of the menu tree, provides
the following functions to initiate and terminate modem connections:
Pass – Initiates a call through the integral modem to access a far-end
DSU/CSU’s front panel from your DSU/CSU’s front panel (or PC attached to
the COM port).
Dial – Initiates a call through the integral modem to a printer, ASCII terminal,
or PC. Sets up a semipermanent connection to route alarm messages to the
specified destination.
Disconnect – Disconnects an active modem connection.
Change Directory – Allows entry of phone numbers into the internal phone
directories.
Entering Numbers in the Phone Directories
The DSU/CSU has five general directories (1 through 5) and one alarm directory
(A). Use the general directories to store phone numbers for remote devices such
as standalone DSU/CSUs and ASCII printers. Use the alarm directory to store the
phone number of the primary ASCII terminal or printer you use to display or print
alarms. This function is not available for carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs because the
integral modem is not available for carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs.
Procedure
To enter or change numbers in the phone directories:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.
key until the Ctrl selection
2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, select Call.
Control:
Call
Rel
LED
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
4. From the Call Setup screen, select ChDir.
Call Setup:
Pass
Dial
ChDir
F2
F3
F1
The Directory 1 displays first, along with its phone number if one has been
entered.
5. Press F1 (Next) to display the next directory (2, in this case). Press F2
(Previous) to display the previous directory (A, in this case). Directories
appear in order, 1 through 5 and then A.
1: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Next
Prev
Edit
F2
F3
F1
6. Press F3 (Edit) to change the displayed directory’s phone number (phone
numbers can be up to 40 characters). If you select Edit, the Edit screen
appears.
1: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Next
Prev
Edit
F2
F3
F1
7. Use the
and
keys to position the cursor under the digit(s) you want to
change. Press F1 to scroll up to a higher digit. Press F2 to scroll down to a
lower digit. The key inserts blanks (default characters) while the key
invokes the End Of Number (EON) character which terminates the dial string
and erases any characters to the right when you use the Save function.
and rules that apply to entering phone numbers.
Example: P9W8135551212
8. Press F3 (Save) to store your changes in nonvolatile memory. If you press
or
before saving the phone number you just changed, the previous
phone number remains in effect.
1: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Up
Down
Save
F2
F3
F1
3-56
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Table 3-6. Valid Phone Number Characters
Valid
Characters
Meaning
Restrictions
0 to 9
* #
DTMF or pulse digits
DTMF digits
—
—
P
Selects Pulse dialing
Pulse or Tone must be specified,
otherwise Tone is the default. This must
be the first character in the string,
unless the first character is B. Then, it
must immediately follow the B.
T
Selects Tone (DTMF) dialing
Wait for dial tone
Tone or Pulse must be specified,
otherwise Tone is the default. This must
be the first character in the string,
unless the first character is B. Then, it
must immediately follow the B.
W
B
—
Blind dialing (you need not wait To be valid, this must be the first
for a dial tone before entering
the dialing sequence)
character in the string.
,
Creates a 2-second pause in
the dialing sequence
—
—
<space> ( ) - Extra characters for readability.
The space is the default
character.
<-
End Of Number (EON)
character, terminates the dial
string and erases all characters
to the right after F3 (Save) is
pressed
—
Initiating a Call for Front Panel Pass-Through Operation
Front panel pass-through initiates a call through the integral modem to access a
far-end DSU/CSU’s front panel from your DSU/CSU’s front panel (or PC attached
to the COM port).
NOTE:
Pass is only available when the FP Pass configuration option has been
is either the front panel or the PC, and the integral modem is not already in
use.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Procedure
To initiate front panel pass-through at the near-end DSU/CSU:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.
key until the Ctrl selection
2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, select Call.
Control:
Call
Rel
LED
F2
F3
F1
4. From the Call Setup screen, select Pass.
Call Setup:
Pass
Dial
ChDir
F2
F3
F1
5. From the Pass Directory screen, press F1 (Up) to display the next higher
numbered directory or press F2 (Down) to select the next lower numbered
directory.
Pass n: xxxxxxxxx
Up
Down
Dial
F2
F3
F1
6. When the number of the desired directory appears on the screen, press F3
(Dial) to place the call.
Pass n: xxxxxxxxx
Up
Down
Dial
F2
F3
F1
3-58
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Initiating a Call for PC, ASCII Terminal/Printer, or SNMP Operation
Use the Dial command to set up a semipermanent connection to route alarm
messages to the specified destination. The Dial command initiates a call through
the integral modem to a printer, ASCII terminal, or PC.
Procedure
To initiate a call at the local DSU/CSU:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.
key until the Ctrl selection
2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, select Call.
Control:
Call
Rel
LED
F2
F3
F1
4. From the Call Setup screen, select Dial. This selection is not available if the
DSU/CSU’s integral modem is already in use.
Call Setup:
Pass
Dial
ChDir
F2
F3
F1
5. From the Dial Directory screen, press F1 (Up) to display the next higher
numbered directory or press F2 (Down) to select the next lower numbered
directory.
Dial n: xxxxxxxxx
Up
Down
Dial
F2
F3
F1
6. When the number of the desired directory appears on the screen, press F3
(Dial) to place the call.
Dial n: xxxxxxxxx
Up
Down
Dial
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Disconnecting the Modem Connection
The Disconnect command enables you to force a disconnect of an active modem
connection from the front panel of the DSU/CSU. This command is only available
when the DSU/CSU modem is connected.
Disconnect methods include:
Using the Disconnect command via the front panel menu (for all dial
connections, or when a pass-through connection is established to another
316x DSU/CSU).
Pressing and holding the
and
front panel keys simultaneously (when a
pass-through connection is established to a remote device other than a
316x DSU/CSU).
Procedure
To disconnect an established modem connection using the Disconnect command:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.
key until the Ctrl selection
2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, select Call.
Control:
Call
Rel
LED
F2
F3
F1
4. From the Call Setup screen, select Disc.
Call Setup:
Disc
ChDir
F2
F3
F1
The modem call is disconnected and the Command Complete screen
appears.
Disconnect:
Command Complete
F2
F3
F1
3-60
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Procedure
To disconnect a modem connection using two front panel keys:
1. Press the
and
keys simultaneously and hold for two seconds.
Call Setup:
Disc
ChDir
F2
F3
F1
The modem call is disconnected and the Command Complete screen
appears.
Enabling the Communication Port for Carrier-Mounted DSU/CSUs
Communication between the carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs and an external PC,
ASCII device, SNMP manager, or async terminal interface (attached either locally
or through an external modem) occurs through a shared communication (COM)
port. (For COM port cabling information, refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series
Carrier Installation Manual.) Unlike standalone DSU/CSUs, the carrier-mounted
DSU/CSUs do not have a dedicated COM port for external access. Once the COM
port is enabled, other COM port configuration options can be selected. These
options are used to configure Port 2 on the Auxiliary Backplane as a COM port for
the carrier.
NOTE:
If a Model 3161 DSU/CSU has the COM port enabled, Port 2 cannot be used
as a data port.
Procedure
To enable the COM port on the carrier-mounted DSU/CSU:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Cnfig.
2. Select the configuration option set to be copied into the Edit area by using the
appropriate Function key. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
3. Select Edit.
4. From the Edit screen, press the
screen.
key until the User selection appears on the
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
5. Select User.
Edit:
Chan
Gen
User
F2
F3
F1
6. Press F1 (Next) until the Com Port configuration option appears.
7. Select Enab to enable the COM port for the carrier-mounted DSU/CSU.
Com Port:
Next
Enab
Disab
F2
F3
F1
The carrier COM port provides the following functionality:
If configured for ASCII, only one ASCII device may be used for the carrier. (If
two COM ports are configured for ASCII, neither will work.)
If configured for Mgmt, each device in the carrier can support an Mgmt COM
port; however, each Mgmt COM port must be connected to a different subnet.
To facilitate IP data routing, the device with the closest link to the SNMP
manager or Telnet client should be configured as the IP Bus Master.
If configured for either ASCII or Mgmt, the carrier COM port may be configured
to control an external device (e.g., modem, x.25 PAD) through the use of AT or
user-specified commands.
The set of valid characters for control of the carrier external COM port device is as
follows:
The numbers: 0–9
The lowercase letters: a–z
The uppercase letters: A–Z
The space (“ ”) character
The ASCII symbols (in ascending order, based on the ASCII code)
The End Of Line (EOL) symbol: ←
The caret (“^”) control character is used to select non-printable ASCII
characters. The caret “^” must be followed by one character which together
available control sequences.
3-62
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Table 3-7. Control Sequence
ASCII
Sequence
^A or ^a
^B or ^b
^C or ^c
^D or ^d
^E or ^e
^F or ^f
^G or ^g
^H or ^h
^I or ^i
^J or ^j
^K or ^k
^L or ^l
^M or ^m
^N or ^n
^O or ^o
^P or ^p
^Q or ^q
^R or ^r
^S or ^s
^T or ^t
^U or ^u
^V or ^v
^W or ^w
^X or ^x
^Y or ^y
^Z or ^z
^{
HEX
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0A
0x0B
0x0C
0x0D
0x0E
0x0F
0x10
0x11
0x12
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
0x17
0x18
0x19
0x1A
0x1B
0x1C
0x1D
0x1E
0x1F
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF or NL
VT
FF or NP
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
^\
^}
GS
^^
RS
^_
US
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Deactivating the Alarm Relay for Carrier-Mounted DSU/CSUs
The Alarm Cut-off command forces a deactivation of the alarm relay on the
3000 Series Carrier during an alarm condition. Since this function only affects the
3000 Series Carrier, it is only available for carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs. The alarm
relay function must first be enabled by the Alarm Relay configuration option (refer
Procedure
To deactivate the alarm relay:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.
key until the Ctrl selection
2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, select ACO.
Control:
ACO
Rel
LED
F2
F3
F1
4. The Command Complete screen appears.
Alarm Cut-Off:
Command Complete
F2
F3
F1
3-64
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Resetting the DSU/CSU
Use the Reset command to perform a power-on reset of the DSU/CSU.
Procedure
To reset the DSU/CSU:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.
key until the Ctrl selection
2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, press the
on the screen.
key until the Reset selection appears
4. Select Reset.
Control:
ClrReg Reset
F2
F3
F1
5. From the Device Reset screen, press F1 to initiate a reset of the DSU/CSU
(the power-up sequence screen appears). Press F2 instead to return to the
Control screen without initiating a reset.
Device Reset:
Yes
No
F2
F3
F1
Download Operations
NOTE:
The Download command is for use by service personnel only. Loss of primary
data could result from improper use.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
3-66
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
User Interface Access Security for Standalone DSU/CSUs
NOTE:
This page of the manual is self-supporting and can be removed to prevent
unwanted knowledge of the security access levels and their selection.
The user interface access security option allows you to limit access to the
DSU/CSU to display-only and non-intrusive functions. The user access security
function is not available for carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs.
Level 1 (Lvl1) access security allows access to all functions available through the
menu tree. This is the default setting.
Level 2 (Lvl2) access security restricts access to only those functions that cannot
affect the operation of the DSU/CSU in any way. At this level,
None of the functions in the Test or Ctrl branches are available.
All functions on the Stat branch are available.
All functions on the Cnfg branch are available for display, but they cannot be
used to save to a configuration area.
You can only reach the screen that controls security access using the front panel.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Operation
Changing User Interface Access Security
Procedure
To change user interface access security:
1. Press the
2. Press the
3. Press the
key two times from the top-level screen.
DSU ESF
Stat
Test
Cnfig
F2
F3
F1
key three times.
DSU ESF
Stat
Test
Cnfig
F2
F3
F1
key once.
DSU ESF
Stat
Test
Cnfig
F2
F3
F1
The Security screen appears.
Security:
Lvl1
Lvl2
F2
F3
F1
4. Press F1 to select Lvl1, or press F2 to select Lvl2. After you make a selection,
the top-level screen appears.
If you do not make a selection within 5 minutes, the Automatic Device
Health/Status screen appears.
3-68
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
4
Overview
The DSU/CSU can detect and report faults, and perform diagnostic tests. These
features ensure that your DSU/CSU is giving you optimum performance in your
network.
Self-Test Health
Use the Self-Test Health command to display the results of the power-up self-test.
Procedure
To display power-up self-test results:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Stat.
DSU ESF
Stat
Test
Cnfig
F2
F3
F1
2. From the Status screen, select STest.
Status:
DevHS STest
Perf
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
3. View the results of the last power-up self-test. If no problems were found
during power-up, the following message appears.
STest Health:
Passed
F2
F3
F1
Table 4-1. Self-Test Health Messages
Message
Passed
Description
No problems were found during power-up.
The central processing unit failed internal testing.
CPU fail
Device fail
One or more of the unit’s integrated circuit chips failed to pass
internal device level testing.
B8ZS/LOS fail
The unit failed to encode data properly or to detect Loss Of
Signal.
Alarm fail
Memory fail
LCD fail
The unit failed to transmit AIS or to detect an Yellow alarm.
The unit failed program checksum verification.
The front panel liquid crystal display (LCD) failed.
The unit failed to internally loop data on the network T1 circuit.
NET T1 fail
DTE T1 fail
The unit failed to internally loop data on the DTE T1 (DSX-1)
circuit.
DSU fail
The unit failed to internally loop data on the DSU.
DSU Portn fail
Modem fail
Port’s integrated circuitry failed to pass device internal testing.
Unit failed to internally loop data through the modem circuit.
Unknown Exp Dev
The unit is not able to recognize the expansion device connected
to the main circuit card.
Failure xxxxxxxx
An 8-digit hexadecimal failure code is provided for service
personnel.
4-2
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Device Health and Status
Use the Device Health and Status branch to view the current health and status
these messages in priority order.
Procedure
To display device health and status:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Stat.
2. From the Status screen, select DevHS.
Status:
DevHS STest Perf
F2
F3
F1
Alarm/status messages appear on Line 2 of the LCD in priority order (highest
to lowest). The DSU/CSU is polled for current status every ten seconds. If the
status has changed from the last poll, the Health and Status screen is updated
and the highest priority message is displayed.
3. Use the scroll keys, if necessary, to scroll additional device health and status
messages onto the LCD.
Device H/S:
OOF at DTE
F2
F3
F1
The Auto Device Health and Status screen appears when there is no activity
(no keys pressed) on the active physical interface for five minutes. Only the
highest priority message appears on Line 2 of the LCD.
Auto Dev H/S
OOF at DTE
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Table 4-2. Device Health and Status Messages (1 of 2)
Message
Description
LOS at Net
A Loss Of Signal condition (175 consecutive zeros) has been
detected on the network interface. The condition is cleared when the
density of ones to zeros received is 12.5%.
LOS at DTE
OOF at Net
OOF at DTE
A Loss Of Signal condition (175 consecutive zeros) has been
detected on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. The condition is
cleared when the density of ones to zeros received is 12.5%.
An Out Of Frame condition (2 out of 4 frame synchronization bits in
error) has been detected on the network interface. The condition is
cleared when a reframe occurs.
An Out Of Frame condition has been detected on the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. The condition is cleared when a
reframe occurs.
AIS at Net
AIS at DTE
EER at Net
An Alarm Indication Signal (unframed all ones signal) is being
received by the network interface.
An Alarm Indication Signal is being received by the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface.
An Excessive Error Rate condition has been detected on the
network interface (the bit error rate has exceeded the configured
threshold for ESF framing). The condition is cleared when the error
rate falls below the threshold value.
Yellow at Net
Yellow at DTE
A Yellow Alarm signal is being received by the network interface.
A Yellow Alarm signal is being received by the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface.
OOF at Prtn
An Out Of Frame condition has been detected on data port Prtn
(where n is the port number). This condition only occurs if the
synchronous data port’s Embedded Data Link (EDL) is enabled (only
available for 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs).
EER at Prtn
The error rate of the received signal has exceeded the configured
threshold for data port Prtn (where n is the port number). This
condition only occurs if the synchronous data port’s Embedded Data
Link (EDL) is enabled (only available for 2-port and 4-port
DSU/CSUs). The condition is cleared when the error rate falls below
the synchronous data port’s configured threshold value.
PORT IP Down
The IP management link is in a down state for PORT (where PORT
is COM, MODEM, or AUX). This condition occurs if the PORT is
configured for Mgmt, and communication between the management
system and the DSU/CSU is not currently possible for this port. For
the AUX port, this condition is detected only when a device reset or
power-up occurs.
Selftest failed
A failure was detected during the power-on self-test. Select STest (in
the Stat branch) to display more information about the failure.
DevFail xxxxxxxx
An internal error has been detected by the operating software. An
8-digit code appears for use by service personnel. The condition is
cleared by resetting the device.
Download failed
A download attempt was interrupted and failed to complete. The
condition is cleared by resetting the device.
4-4
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Table 4-2. Device Health and Status Messages (2 of 2)
Message
Description
Test in progress
A test is currently active. Select Tstat (in the Stat branch) to display
more test information.
Modem
Connected
The integral modem is currently connected. This message is only
displayed for standalone DSU/CSUs.
Master Clk fail
The master clock has failed. Timing for the DSU/CSU is provided by
the internal clock.
DSU Operational
This message only appears if there are no valid alarm or status
messages.
Performance Reports
When the network interface is configured for ESF operation, network performance
is continuously monitored and maintained in two sets of aggregate registers:
Carrier Network Interface Registers (Telco) and User Network Interface Registers
(User). The User registers contain an extra status register (Status Event).
Registers. These registers are status registers that collect performance data for
the previous 24-hour period. Performance data is updated in 15-minute intervals.
After 15 minutes, the current interval is rolled over into a set of accumulator
registers that represent the previous 96 15-minute intervals for the register. An
interval total of how many of the 96 registers contain valid data is also kept, as well
as a 24-hour total for each accumulator register.
For 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs, port performance is continuously monitored and
maintained in memory registers when the port is configured to use EDL. The
DSU/CSU maintains two sets of port registers for each synchronous data port:
far-end port registers and near-end port registers. These registers are status
registers that collect performance data for the previous 8-hour period. Port data is
updated in 15-minute intervals. After 15 minutes, the current interval is rolled over
into a set of accumulator registers that represent the previous 32 15-minute
intervals for the register. An interval total of how many of the 32 registers contain
valid data is also kept, as well as a 8-hour total for each accumulator register.
NOTE:
The following procedure is an example only. Screen displays may vary
depending on the model and configuration of the DSU/CSU. The
procedures for displaying Telco and port registers are similar to this example.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Procedure
To display User Network Interface (User) performance:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Stat.
2. From the Status screen, select Perf.
Status:
DevHS STest
Perf
F2
F3
F1
3. Select User registers.
Performance:
Telco
User
Prt1
F2
F3
F1
4. From the User Registers screen, press F1 to view current registers (go to
Step 5), press F2 to view 24-Hour Totals (go to Step 6), or press F3 to view
15-Minute Interval Registers (go to Step 7).
User Registers:
Cur
24Tot
Intvl
F2
F3
F1
5. When you press F1 from the User Registers screen, the User registers for the
current 15-minute interval appear.
User Current:
Event = xx,xxx
F2
F3
F1
6. When you press F2 from the User Registers screen, the User registers for the
24-hour total interval appear.
User 24 Hour:
VldIntvl = xx
F2
F3
F1
4-6
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
7. When you press F3 from the User Registers screen, the interval screen
appears. Use this screen to choose the specific 15-minute interval.
User Intvl: 01
Up
Down
Dsply
F2
F3
F1
8. Use the
and
keys to position the cursor under the first or second digit in
the interval number displayed, then use the F1 (Up) and F2 (Down) keys to
increment/decrement the number.
9. When you have selected the number of the interval you want to display, press
F3 (Dsply) to display the registers for the interval selected. Use the scroll keys
to view additional register information.
User Intvl: xx
ES=xxx
F2
F3
F1
You can reset the performance registers via the ClrReg command in the Control
branch of the front panel menu.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Procedure
To clear the performance registers:
1. From the top-level menu screen, press the
appears on the screen.
key until the Ctrl selection
2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, press the
on the screen.
key until the ClrReg selection appears
4. Select ClrReg.
Control:
Rel
LED
ClrReg
F2
F3
F1
5. From the Clear Prf Regs screen, press F1 to clear the User registers.
Clear Prf Regs:
User
Prt1
Prt2
F2
F3
F1
If you selected User, the User performance registers are cleared, all
accumulators are reset to zero, and all status registers are cleared. The
current interval timer, the number of valid intervals count, and the total 24-hour
counts are reset to zero. The Command Completemessage then appears.
4-8
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Table 4-3. Performance Registers (1 of 2)
Register
Interval Description
Totals Description
Event
ESF error events counter. An error N/A
event is an ESF frame with either a
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)
error or an Out Of Frame (OOF)
event. The maximum count is
65,535. This register is only reset
as a result of a reset command from
the network. This register is valid for
the current interval only.
CurTimer
VldIntvl
Current interval timer. This register N/A
records the number of seconds in
the current 15-minute interval. The
maximum is 900 seconds. This
register is valid for the current
interval only.
N/A
Valid interval total. Records the
number of valid 15-minute intervals
in the previous x hours, where x is
24 hours for aggregate performance
and 8 hours for port performance.
This register is not valid for the
current interval.
ES
The number of errored seconds for The total number of errored seconds
the current interval. An errored
second is any second with one or
more ESF error events. The
maximum is 900 seconds.
for the previous x hours, where x is
24 hours for aggregate performance
and 8 hours for port performance.
UAS
The number of unavailable seconds The total number of unavailable
for the current interval. An
unavailable second is any one
second interval when service is
seconds for the previous x hours,
where x is 24 hours for aggregate
performance and 8 hours for port
unavailable. (Detection occurs with performance.
10 consecutive unavailable
seconds.) The maximum is
900 seconds.
SES
BES
The number of severely errored
seconds for the current interval. A
severely errored second is any
second with 320 or more CRC
errors, or any second with one or
more OOF events. The maximum is
900 seconds.
The total number of severely errored
seconds for the previous x hours,
where x is 24 hours for aggregate
performance and 8 hours for port
performance.
The number of bursty errored
seconds for the current interval. A
bursty errored second is any
The total number of bursty errored
seconds for the previous x hours,
where x is 24 hours for aggregate
second with more than one, but less performance and 8 hours for port
than 320, CRC errors. The
maximum is 900 seconds.
performance.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Table 4-3. Performance Registers (2 of 2)
Register
Interval Description
Totals Description
LOFC
The loss of frame count for the
current interval. This is a count of
The total loss of frame count for the
previous x hours, where x is
the number of times that an LOF is 24 hours for aggregate performance
declared. The maximum count is
255.
and 8 hours for port performance.
CSS
The number of controlled slip
seconds for the current interval.
The total number of controlled slip
seconds for the previous x hours,
where x is 24 hours for aggregate
performance and 8 hours for port
performance.
(Not valid
for Port
registers.)
StEvnt
(Only valid
for User
The status events register records
whether one or more of the
following events have occurred at
least once during the interval. The
event is identified by a letter as
follows:
N/A
registers.)
Y – A Yellow Alarm signal has
been received on the network
interface.
L – Loss Of Signal has occurred
on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface.
E – The Excessive Error Rate
threshold has been exceeded.
F – A Frame Synchronization Bit
Error has been detected.
V – A Bipolar Violation has been
detected.
If none of these events occurred
during the interval, StEvnt=none
will be displayed.
Complete
(Only valid
for far-end
port
Bad line conditions or loopback
tests may prevent far-end port
statistics from reaching the
N/A
DSU/CSU. This field indicates
whether the 15-minute interval
contains 900 seconds of statistics.
If one or more seconds of far-end
statistics are missing, this field will
display Complete=No, otherwise it
will display Complete=Yes. This
field is only displayed when Far is
selected from the Prtn screen.
registers.)
4-10
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Alarms
The DSU/CSU can be attached, either locally or remotely, to an ASCII terminal or
printer to display or print alarm messages. Alarms can also be displayed on a PC
that is using a terminal emulation package.
For standalone DSU/CSUs, you can route these alarms to the MODEM port, the
COM port, or both. For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, you can route them to the
COM port or dial them out using an external device.
Each alarm message contains a customer identification to indicate which remote
DSU/CSU is reporting an alarm. For information about customer identification,
Possible alarm messages are as follows:
Continuous Loss Of Signal detected at the x Interface
(where x is either Network or DTE).
Alarm Cleared. Loss Of Signal condition at the x Interface
(where x is either Network or DTE).
Continuous Out Of Frame condition detected at the x
Interface(where x is either Network or DTE).
Alarm Cleared. Out Of Frame condition at the x Interface
(where x is either Network or DTE).
Alarm Indication Signal received at the x Interface
(where x is either Network or DTE).
Alarm Cleared. Alarm Indication Signal at the x Interface
(where x is either Network or DTE).
An Excessive Error Rate has been detected at the Network
Interface.
Alarm Cleared. An Excessive Error Rate at the Network
Interface.
Yellow Alarm signal received at the x Interface
(where x is either Network or DTE).
Alarm Cleared. Yellow Alarm signal at the x Interface
(where x is either Network or DTE).
Continuous Out Of Frame condition detected at synchronous
data port n(where n is the port number).
Alarm Cleared. Out Of Frame condition at synchronous data
port n (where n is the port number).
An Excessive Error Rate has been detected at synchronous
data port n (where n is the port number).
Alarm Cleared. An Excessive Error Rate at synchronous data
port n (where n is the port number).
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
If two alarm conditions are detected at once, the higher priority alarm is reported.
However, if an even higher priority alarm is detected before the first alarm is
cleared, the later alarm is not reported. (The alarms listed above are in priority
order with the highest priority listed first.)
Alarms remain active until the alarm condition is cleared. Also, an alarm clear
message is only sent when there are no other alarms active.
For information about alarm configuration options, refer to Alarm Configuration
SNMP Traps
SNMP traps are unsolicited messages that are sent from the DSU/CSU to an
SNMP manager when the DSU/CSU detects certain pre-specified conditions.
These traps enable the SNMP manager to monitor the state of the network.
The SNMP Trap configuration option must be enabled for trap messages to be
sent over the communications link. You must specify the number of SNMP
managers that are to receive traps from this DSU/CSU, an IP address for each
SNMP manager specified, and the type of traps to be sent from this DSU/CSU. For
Trap types consist of the following:
General traps – Include warmStart and authenticationFailure. The DSU/CSU
sends a warmStart trap after it has been reset to indicate that it has just
reinitialized itself. The DSU/CSU sends an authenticationFailure trap when it
has received an SNMP protocol message that has not been properly
authenticated. These traps are set by the Gen Trap configuration option.
Enterprise Specific traps – Signify that the DSU/CSU has recognized an
for enterprise-specific traps. These traps are set by the Entp Trap configuration
option.
Link Traps – Identify the condition of the communications interface, either
linkDown (one of the communications interfaces has failed) or linkUp (one of
the communications interfaces has just come up). These traps are set by the
Link Trap configuration option. The communications interfaces for which these
traps can be generated are specified by the Trap I/F configuration option.
4-12
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Table 4-4. Enterprise-Specific Trap Definitions
Trap Value
Event
enterpriseClockFail(1)
enterpriseSelfTestFail(2)
The currently configured master clock source has failed.
A DSU/CSU hardware failure is detected at self-test. This
trap is generated after DSU/CSU initialization.
enterpriseDeviceFail(3)
enterpriseTestStart(5)
An internal DSU/CSU failure is detected by the operating
software.
A test is initiated.
enterpriseConfigChange(6) A configuration option is changed.
enterpriseTestClear(105) A test is concluded.
Table 4-5. SNMP Trap per Interface
Interface
Trap Meaning
T1 Network
Up = No alarm or test conditions.
Down = Alarm or test conditions.
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
Synchronous Data Ports
Up = No alarm or test conditions, and the interface is
enabled.
Down = Alarm or test conditions, or the interface is
disabled.
Up = No test conditions, the port is assigned to a network
interface, and both CTS and DSR are ON.
Down = Test conditions, the port is unassigned, or either
CTS or DSR is off.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Troubleshooting
The DSU/CSU is designed to provide you with trouble-free service. However,
For problems other than those listed in the table, please contact your service
representative.
Table 4-6. Troubleshooting (1 of 3)
Symptom
Possible Cause
Solutions
No power
1. The power module is not
securely attached.
1. Check the power module
attachment.
2. The wall receptacle has no
power.
2. Check the wall receptacle
power by plugging in some
equipment that is known to be
working.
Power-Up
The DSU/CSU has detected an Contact your service
Self-Test fails
internal hardware failure.
representative.
Message LOS at 1. Network cable problem.
NETappears
1. Check that the network cable
is securely attached at both
ends.
2. No signal is being transmitted 2. Check the far-end status.
at the far-end.
3. Facility problem.
3. Contact your facility provider.
Message LOS at 1. DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
1. Check that the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) cable is
securely attached at both
ends.
DTEappears
cable problem.
2. No signal being transmitted
from the DTE.
2. Check the DTE status.
Message OOF at 1. Incompatible framing format
1. Check that the framing format
for the network interface is
correct.
Net appears
between the network and the
DSU/CSU.
2. Network cabling problem.
3. Facility problem.
2. Check that the network cable
is securely attached at both
ends.
3. Contact your facility provider.
Message OOF at 1. Incompatible framing format
1. Check that the framing format
for the DTE Drop/Insert
DTEappears
between the Drop/Insert port
on the customer premises
equipment and the
(DSX-1) interface is correct.
DSU/CSU.
2. DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
cabling problem.
2. Check that the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) cable is
securely attached at both
ends.
4-14
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Table 4-6. Troubleshooting (2 of 3)
Symptom
Possible Cause
Solutions
Message
Yellow at Net
appears
1. Network cable problem.
1 Check that your network cable
is securely attached at both
ends.
2. Far-end device has lost
framing sync on the line.
2. Check the status of the far-end
device.
3. Facility problem.
3. Contact your facility provider.
1. Check the status of the DTE.
Message
DTE has detected an LOS or
Yellow at DTE LOF condition.
appears
2. Check that the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) cable is
securely attached at both
ends.
Message
AIS at Net
appears
1. Upstream device is
1. Check the status of the
upstream device(s).
transmitting an AIS.
2. The network is transmitting
an AIS.
2. Contact your facility provider.
Message
DTE is sending an AIS.
Check the DTE.
AIS at DTE
appears
Message EER at Facility problem.
Contact your facility provider.
Netappears
BPV LED is ON
1. Incompatible line coding
1. Check that the line coding
format for the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface is correct.
format between the DTE and
the DSU/CSU.
2. DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
cable problem.
2. Check that the DTE cable is
securely attached at both
ends.
A failure message Internal DSU/CSU problem.
appears followed
by an 8-digit code
Record the 8-digit code, then
contact your service
representative.
(x x x x x x x x )
Mgmt link is down 1. The manager configuration is 1. Check that the configurations
mismatched with the
are matched.
DSU/CSU configuration.
2. The manager’s link layer
2. Start the link layer protocol.
protocol is not running.
No SNMP
communication via
the AUX port
1. Cable problem.
1. Check that the cable is
securely attached at both
ends.
2. The link layer protocol is not
running.
2. Change the Aux Use
configuration option to None,
and then back to SNMP or
Daisy (as appropriate).
Invalid Number
The modem cannot dial because Check that the selected phone
the phone number is invalid or
there is no number in the
selected directory.
number is correct.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Table 4-6. Troubleshooting (3 of 3)
Symptom
Possible Cause
Solutions
No Dial Tone
The modem cannot dial because Check that the modem is
there is no dial tone.
connected properly.
Busy Signal
The modem is receiving a busy
signal.
Redial the phone number later.
No Answer Tone
Modem In Use
The remote end does not
answer within 45 seconds.
Redial the phone number later.
Redial the phone number later.
The modem is in use.
4-16
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Test Jacks
For 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs, six test jacks are located on the front panel
menu tree allows you to select either EQPT (Equipment) or NET (Network).
NET
In
MON EQPT
In
In
Out
Out
Out
496-14808
Figure 4-1. Test Jacks (Standalone DSU/CSU)
Procedure
To change the Mon (Monitor) selection in 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs:
1. From the top-level menu, press the
the screen.
key until the Ctrl selection appears on
2. Select Ctrl.
3. From the Control screen, press the
the screen.
key until the Mon selection appears on
4. Select Mon.
Control:
Passwd Mon
F2
F3
F1
5. From the Mon Jack screen, press F1 to select EQPT (the default), or press F2
to select NET.
Mon Jack: EQPT
EQPT
NET
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
EQPT NET
MON
In
In
Out
Mon Jack: EQPT
Mon Jack: NET
(Selectable)
TERMINAL
EQUIPMENT
(DTE)
INTERNAL
CIRCUITRY
LINE
RECEIVER
LINE
RECEIVER
NETWORK
(Selectable)
Mon Jack: EQPT
Mon Jack: NET
EQPT NET
MON
Out
Out
In
496-14875
Figure 4-2. Test Jack Block Diagram
Table 4-7. Test Jack Functions
Test Jack Name
Function
NET In
(Network In)
A break-in test jack that allows a signal to be inserted toward
the network by external test equipment.
NET Out
(Network Out)
A break-in test jack that interrupts the signal coming from the
network and allows it to be terminated by the external test
equipment.
EQPT In
(Equipment In)
A break-in test jack that allows a signal to be inserted toward
the terminal equipment (DTE) by external test equipment.
EQPT Out
(Equipment Out)
A break-in test jack that interrupts the signal coming from the
terminal equipment (DTE) and allows it to be terminated by the
external test equipment.
MON In
(Monitor In)
A monitor jack that is controlled by the Mon (Monitor) branch of
the menu tree. If it is set to EQPT (the default), this jack
monitors the signal going into the terminal equipment (DTE). If
it is set to NET, this jack monitors the signal going into the
network.
MON Out
(Monitor Out)
A monitor jack that is controlled by the Mon (Monitor) branch of
the menu tree. If it is set to EQPT (the default), this jack
monitors the signal coming from the terminal equipment
(DTE). If it is set to NET, this jack monitors the signal coming
from the network.
4-18
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Test Commands
The test commands enable you to run loopbacks and test patterns on the
DSU/CSU, and to test the front panel LEDs. These tests can help you isolate
areas of trouble if you are having problems with your DSU/CSU.
To access all Test commands from the Test branch, press F2 to select Test from
the top-level menu screen.
DSU ESF
Stat
Test
Cnfig
F2
F3
F1
Remote Loopback Tests
The Remote Loopback tests enable you to troubleshoot your circuit by sending the
following to a far-end device:
For Networks
Line loopback up activation sequence for 10 seconds (LLBUP)
Line loopback down activation sequence for 10 seconds (LLBDN)
For Channels
V.54 activation sequence to initiate a V.54 Loop 2 (54UP)
V.54 deactivation sequence to terminate a V.54 Loop (54DN)
ANSI T1.403 (Annex B) activation sequence to initiate a DCLB on the remote
device (FT1UP)
ANSI T1.403 (Annex B) deactivation sequence to terminate a DCLB on the
remote device (FT1DN)
You cannot perform remote loopbacks if any of the local loopbacks are active. If
you attempt to do so, the error message Invld Test Combo(Invalid Test
Combination) appears.
NOTE:
The following procedures are examples only. Screen displays may vary
depending on the model and configuration of the DSU/CSU.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Sending a Line Loopback Up or Down
Procedure
To send a Line Loopback Up or Down sequence on the network to a far-end
DSU/CSU:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Rlpbk.
Test:
Rlpbk
Lpbk
Ptrns
F2
F3
F1
3. From the Rem Loopback screen, press F1 to select LLBUP (Line Loopback
Up), or press F2 to select LLBDN (Line Loopback Down).
Rem Loopback:
LLBUP LLBDN 54UP
F2
F3
F1
The Line Loopback sequence is sent up or downstream to the far-end
DSU/CSU for 10 seconds. During this time, Sendingappears on Line 2 of the
LCD, followed by Command Completewhen 10 seconds have elapsed.
You can press any function key to restore the Rem Loopback screen without
affecting transmission of the loopback code.
4-20
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Sending a V.54/ANSI FT1 Activation/Deactivation
Procedure
To send a V.54 or ANSI FT1 Activation or Deactivation loopback sequence to the
far-end DSU/CSU:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Rlpbk.
Test:
Rlpbk
Lpbk
Ptrns
F2
F3
F1
3. From the Rem Loopback screen, press the function key that corresponds to
the specific loopback test you want to perform. Use the scroll keys, if
necessary.
Rem Loopback:
LLBUP LLBDN 54UP
F2
F3
F1
The Rem Loop screen appears.
Rem Loop: Type
Prt1
Prt2
Prt3
F2
F3
F1
The 54UP, 54DN, FT1UP, and FT1DN commands send the requested
sequence out the network interface on the DS0 channels allocated to the port
you select here.
4. From the Rem Loop screen, press the desired function key to select the
specific port. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
After you select a port, the sequence is sent to the far-end DSU/CSU. During
this time, Sendingappears on Line 2 of the LCD, followed by Command
Completewhen the sequence is complete.
During the Sendingmessage, you can press the
and
keys without
affecting transmission of the loopback sequence.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Local Loopback Tests
The Local Loopback tests enable you to conduct circuit testing and fault isolation
for the digital line. The supported local loopback tests are:
Line Loopback (LLB)
Payload Loopback (PLB)
DTE Loopback (DLB)
Repeater Loopback (RLB)
Data Channel Loopback (DCLB)
Data Terminal Loopback (DTLB)
NOTE:
DLB does not appear when the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface is disabled.
The Line Loopback command can be activated and deactivated in response to
commands received over the network interface. The Network Interface
configuration option NET LLB controls whether the DSU/CSU responds to the
commands transmitted on the network interface to initiate LLBs (see Appendix C,
The data port configuration option NET DCLB controls whether the DSU/CSU
Local loopback tests can be aborted (Abort Command) at any time.
No more than two local loopbacks can be active at any one time. An additional
restriction prohibits certain loopbacks from running at the same time. Valid
identified by YES.
Table 4-8. Valid Loopback Combinations
LLB
N/A
PLB
NO
DLB
YES
YES
N/A
RLB
YES
NO
DCLB
NO
DTLB
YES
LLB
PLB
DLB
RLB
NO
N/A
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
N/A
NO
YES
DCLB NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
(on separate ports)
(on separate ports)
DTLB YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
(on separate ports)
(on separate ports)
4-22
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Starting a Line Loopback
The Line Loopback command (LLB) loops the received signal on the network
interface back to the network without change.
DSU
CSU
NETWORK
INTERFACE
DTE
(DSX-1)
ALL
1s
LLB
ALL 1s
ALL 1s
496-14319-02
PORT 2 PORT 1
Procedure
To perform a Line loopback:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Lpbk.
Test:
Rlpbk
Lpbk
Ptrns
F2
F3
F1
3. From the Loopback screen, select LLB.
Loopback:
Abort
LLB
PLB
F2
F3
F1
Test Started appears on Line 2. If a line loopback is already in progress,
the Already Activemessage appears. If an invalid combination of
loopbacks is in progress, the error message Invld Test Comboappears
combinations).
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Starting a Payload Loopback
The Payload Loopback command (PLB) loops the received signal on the network
interface back to the network. The signal is looped back as close to the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) port as possible (after it has passed through the framing
circuitry of the DSU/CSU). Framing CRCs and BPVs are corrected.
DSU
CSU
NETWORK
INTERFACE
DTE
(DSX-1)
ALL
1s
PLB
ALL 1s
ALL 1s
496-14316-02
PORT 2 PORT 1
Procedure
To perform a Payload loopback:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Lpbk.
Test:
Rlpbk
Lpbk
Ptrns
F2
F3
F1
3. From the Loopback screen, select PLB.
Loopback:
Abort
LLB
PLB
F2
F3
F1
Test Started appears on Line 2. If a Payload loopback is already in
progress, the Already Activemessage appears. If an invalid combination
of loopbacks is in progress, the error message Invld Test Comboappears
combinations).
4-24
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Starting a DTE Loopback
The DTE Loopback command (DLB) loops the received signal on the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) port back to the DTE without change.
DSU
CSU
NETWORK
INTERFACE
DTE
(DSX-1)
DLB
ALL 1s
496-14317-02
PORT 2
PORT 1
Procedure
To perform a DTE loopback:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Lpbk.
Test:
Rlpbk
Lpbk
Ptrns
F2
F3
F1
3. From the Loopback screen, press the
on the screen.
key until the DLB selection appears
4. Select DLB.
Loopback:
LLB
PLB
DLB
F2
F3
F1
Test Startedappears on Line 2. If a DTE loopback is already in progress,
the Already Activemessage appears. If an invalid combination of
loopbacks is in progress, the error message Invld Test Combo appears
combinations).
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Starting a Repeater Loopback
The Repeater Loopback command (RLB) loops the signal being sent to the
network back to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) and data ports. The signal is looped
back as close to the network interface as possible (after it has passed through the
framing circuitry of the DSU/CSU). Framing CRCs and BPVs are corrected.
DSU
CSU
NETWORK
INTERFACE
DTE
(DSX-1)
RLB
ALL 1s
496-14318-02
PORT 1
PORT 2
Procedure
To perform a Repeater loopback:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Lpbk.
Test:
Rlpbk
Lpbk
Ptrns
F2
F3
F1
3. From the Loopback screen, press the
on the screen.
key until the RLB selection appears
4. Select RLB.
Loopback:
PLB
DLB
RLB
F2
F3
F1
Test Started appears on Line 2. If a Repeater loopback is already in
progress, the Already Activemessage appears. If an invalid combination
of loopbacks is in progress, the error message Invld Test Comboappears
combinations).
4-26
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Starting a Data Channel Loopback
The Data Channel Loopback command (DCLB) loops the data received from the
network interface, for all DS0 channels allocated to the selected port, back to the
network. The loopback occurs after the data passes through the port circuitry but
before it is sent out the data port.
DSU
CSU
NETWORK
INTERFACE
DTE
(DSX-1)
DCLB
DCLB
ALL 1s
ALL 1s
496-14315-02
PORT 2 PORT 1
Procedure
To perform a Data Channel loopback:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Lpbk.
Test:
Rlpbk
Lpbk
Ptrns
F2
F3
F1
3. From the Loopback screen, press the
appears on the screen.
key until the DCLB selection
4. Select DCLB.
Loopback:
DLB
RLB
DCLB
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
5. From the DCLB screen, press the Function key for the port for which you want
to perform the data channel loopback. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
Loopback: DCLB
Prt1
Prt2
Prt3
F2
F3
F1
Test Started appears on Line 2. If a Data Channel loopback is already in
progress, the Already Activemessage appears. If an invalid combination
of loopbacks is in progress, the error message Invld Test Comboappears
combinations).
Starting a Data Terminal Loopback
The Data Terminal Loopback command (DTLB) loops the data received from the
selected port, for all DS0 channels allocated to the port, back out of the port. This
loopback occurs after the data passes through the port circuitry but before it
reaches the T1 framer.
DSU
CSU
ALL 1s
NETWORK
INTERFACE
DTE
(DSX-1)
DTLB
PORT 2
DTLB
PORT 1
496-14314-02
Procedure
To perform a Data Terminal loopback:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Lpbk.
Test:
Rlpbk
Lpbk
Ptrns
F2
F3
F1
3. From the Loopback screen, press the
on the screen.
key until the DTLB selection appears
4-28
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
4. Select DTLB.
Loopback:
RLB
DCLB
DTLB
F2
F3
F1
5. From the DTLB screen, press the Function key for the port for which you want
to perform the data terminal loopback. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
Loopback: DTLB
Prt1
Prt2
Prt3
F2
F3
F1
Test Started appears on Line 2. If a Data Terminal loopback is already in
progress, the Already Activemessage appears. If an invalid combination
of loopbacks is in progress, the error message Invld Test Comboappears
combinations).
Aborting Loopbacks
The Abort Loopback command stops all loopback tests or any selected loopback
test currently active on the DSU/CSU.
Procedure
To abort one or more loopback tests:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Lpbk.
Test:
Rlpbk
Lpbk
Ptrns
F2
F3
F1
3. From the Loopback screen, select Abort.
Loopback:
Abort
LLB
PLB
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
4. From the Loopback Abort screen, press the desired Function key to abort All
or one specific loopback test. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
Loopback: Abort
All
LLB
PLB
F2
F3
F1
If you select ALL, LLB, PLB, DLB, or RLB, skip Step 5.
5. From the Abort screen, press the Function key that corresponds to the port for
which you want to abort the test. Use the scroll keys, if necessary.
Abort: Test Name
Prt1
Prt2
Prt3
F2
F3
F1
When abort is complete, the message Command Completeappears on the
Abort screen.
NOTE:
If you mistakenly choose to abort a loopback test that is not currently running,
a Command Completemessage will still display and the loopback that is
currently active will still be running. Use the TStat branch to view the test
status to determine if the abort was successful.
Test Patterns
Use the Test Pattern commands to send, monitor, and abort test patterns.
Available test patterns are:
QRSS – A quasi-random signal source approximating live data that can be
monitored for logic errors (on the network and the data ports).
1-in-8 – A test pattern consisting of a one (1) followed by seven zeros (on the
network only).
511 – A pseudo-random bit sequence (PRBS) that is 511 bits long (on the
data ports only). This is a PRBS 29–1 test.
4-30
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Sending Test Patterns
Use the Send command to start transmission of a test pattern.
combinations are identified by YES.
Procedure
To send a test pattern:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Ptrns.
Test:
Rlpbk
Lpbk
Ptrns
F2
F3
F1
3. From the Patterns screen, select Send.
Patterns:
Abort
Send
Mon
F2
F3
F1
4. From the Patterns Send screen, press F1 to send a QRSS pattern, F2 to send
a 1-in-8 pattern, F3 to send a 511 pattern.
Patterns: Send
QRSS
1in8
511
F2
F3
F1
If you send a 1-in-8 pattern, skip Step 5.
5. From the Send screen, press the Function key that corresponds to network or
the port for which you want to send a test pattern. Use the scroll keys, if
necessary. (NET does not appear for the 511 pattern.)
Send: Name
NET
Prt1
Prt2
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
The Test Started screen appears.
Send: Name and Dest
Test Started
F2
F3
F1
If the DSU/CSU is already sending the test pattern you selected, the message
Already activeappears. If you selected an incompatible test pattern
Table 4-9. Valid Send Test Pattern Combinations
QRSS
1-in8
(Network)
QRSS (Port)
(Network)
511 (Port)
N/A
NO
NO
NO
QRSS
(Network)
NO
NO
YES (on
separate ports)
N/A
N/A
YES (on
separate ports)
QRSS (Port)
NO
NO
1 in 8
(Network)
NO
N/A
N/A
YES (on
separate ports)
511 (Port)
4-32
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Monitoring Test Patterns
Use the Monitor command to monitor a QRSS test pattern over all the channels on
the network interface, or to monitor QRSS or 511 test patterns on the channels
allocated to an individual port.
This command provides the number of errors detected in the test pattern (5 digits,
maximum 99999).
Procedure
To monitor a QRSS or 511 test pattern:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Ptrns.
Test:
Rlpbk
Lpbk
Ptrns
F2
F3
F1
3. From the Patterns screen, select Mon.
Patterns:
Abort
Send
Mon
F2
F3
F1
4. From the Patterns Mon screen, press F1 for QRSS or F2 for 511.
Patterns: Mon
QRSS
511
F2
F3
F1
5. From the Monitor screen, press the Function key that corresponds to network
or the port for which you want to send a test pattern. Use the scroll keys, if
necessary. (NET does not appear for the 511 pattern.
Monitor: Name
NET
Prt1
Prt2
F2
F3
F1
The Monitor screen appears with the error count. If the maximum of 99999 is
exceeded, OvrFlwappears instead of the count. If the receiver loses
synchronization while the monitor is active, No Sync appears.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Aborting Test Patterns
Use the Abort command to stop all test patterns or any selected test pattern active
on the DSU/CSU.
Procedure
To abort test patterns:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, select Ptrns.
Test:
Rlpbk
Lpbk
Ptrns
F2
F3
F1
3. From the Patterns screen, select Abort.
Patterns:
Abort
Send
Mon
F2
F3
F1
4. From the Patterns Abort screen, press the desired Function key to abort either
All active test patterns, active Send test patterns, or the active Monitor (Mon)
test pattern.
Patterns: Abort
All
Send
Mon
F2
F3
F1
If you select All, the DSU/CSU terminates all active test patterns and displays
the message Command Complete. Skip Step 5.
NOTE:
If you mistakenly choose to abort a test pattern that is not currently
running, a Command Completemessage still displays and the test
pattern currently active still runs. Use the TStat branch to view the test
status to determine if the abort was successful.
4-34
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
5. From the Abort screen, press the Function key that corresponds to the
network or port for which you want to abort a test pattern. Use the scroll keys,
if necessary.
Abort: Send or Mon
NET
Prt1
Prt2
F2
F3
F1
The DSU/CSU terminates the selected test pattern and displays the message
Command Complete.
Lamp Test
Use the Lamp Test commands to start and stop a test of the DSU/CSU front panel
LCD and LEDs.
Starting a Lamp Test
Procedure
To start a Lamp test:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Test.
2. From the Test screen, press the
the screen.
key until the Lamp selection appears on
3. From the Test screen, select Lamp.
Test:
Lpbk
Ptrns Lamp
F2
F3
F1
4. From the Lamp Test screen, select Start.
Lamp Test:
Abort
Start
F2
F3
F1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
5. The following screens alternately appear on the LCD until you press a
Function key to return to the Lamp Test screen. In addition, all LEDs blink.
❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚
❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚❚
F2
F3
F1
0123456789 : ; < = > ?
@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
F2
F3
F1
6. When you are satisfied that all LEDs are lighting and the LCD is functioning
properly, abort the Lamp test from the Lamp Test screen. If there is no activity
on the DSU/CSU front panel for five minutes, the Device Health and Status
screen appears automatically. However, the Lamp test remains active until it is
aborted.
Aborting a Lamp Test
Procedure
To abort the Lamp test:
1. Display the Lamp Test screen. To do this when the LCD is alternating the
Lamp test screens, press any Function key. Otherwise, follow Steps 1
through 3 for starting a Lamp test.
Lamp Test:
Abort
Start
F2
F3
F1
2. From the Lamp Test screen, select Abort.
Lamp Test:
Abort
Start
F2
F3
F1
4-36
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Displaying DSU/CSU Test Status
Use the Test Status command to display the active tests for the DSU/CSU. Status
Procedure
To display test status:
1. From the top-level menu screen, select Stat.
2. From the Status screen, press the
the screen.
key until the TStat selection appears on
3. Select TStat.
Status:
STest
Perf
TStat
F2
F3
F1
The Test Status screen appears showing you what tests are active for the
DSU/CSU.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maintenance
Table 4-10. Test Status Message
Message
Description
No Test Active
LLB Test Active
PLB Test Active
DLB Test Active
RLB Test Active
DCLB on Port n
DTLB on Port n
QRSS on Net
1–8 Test Active
QRSS on Port n
No tests are currently active.
The network interface is in Line loopback.
The network interface is in Payload loopback.
The DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) port is in DTE loopback.
The DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) port is in Repeater loopback.
Port n is in a Data Channel loopback.
Port n is in a Data Terminal loopback.
A QRSS test pattern is being sent on the network interface.
A 1-in-8 test pattern is being sent on the network interface.
A QRSS test pattern is being sent to the network on the channels
allocated to port n.
511 on Port n
A 511 test pattern is being sent to the network on the channels
allocated to port n.
Mon QRSS, Net
A QRSS test pattern is being monitored on the network interface.
Mon QRSS, Port n
A QRSS test pattern is being monitored on the channels
allocated to port n.
Mon 511, Port n
DLB Test, Extrn
Lamp Test Active
A 511 test pattern is being monitored on the channels allocated to
port n.
The DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) port is being held in DTE loopback
by the external contact.
The Lamp test is currently active.
4-38
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Panel Menu
A
DSU ESF
Test
Ctrl
Stat
Cnfig
ACO
❚
LED
Reset Passwd
Mon
DevHS
STest Perf TStat LED ID
Rel
ClrReg CID DL
Call
Telco
User
Prtn T1 Prtn
EQPT NET
Rlpbk
Lpbk
Ptrns
Lamp
Near
Far
Pass Dial Disc ChDir
Cur 24Tot Intvl
❚
User Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4
Cur 8Tot Intvl
Abort Send
Mon
1 . . 5,A
(Directory)
1 . . 5,A
(Directory)
Near
Far
QRSS 511
LLBUP LLBDN 54UP 54DN FT1UP FT1DN
QRSS 1in8 511
DTE Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4
Abort LLB PLB DLB RLB DCLB DTLB
Load Edit Area From:
Activ Cust1 Cust2 Fact1 Fact2
Choose Function:
Edit
Save
Activ Cust1 Cust2
DTE
Port
NET
Chan
Gen
User
Alarm
Mgmt
Copy Prt1
Port Select :
Prt2
Prt3
Prt4
Gen Trap
Dsply Clear DTE Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4
All Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4
❚ For Carrier-Mounted DSU/CSUs only
For Standalone DSU/CSUs only
For 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs only
❚
496-14945
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Front Panel Menu
A-2
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Specifications
B
Overview
specifications for the carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs are listed in the ACCULINK
3151 CSU and 3161 DSU/CSU General Information Guide.
Table B-1. Models 3160/3164/3165/DSU/CSU’s Technical Specifications
Specifications
Criteria
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Typical:
AC Power Module
Refer to the labeling on the ac power module for input
requirements
Optional:
+24 Vdc
+20 Vdc to +32 Vdc, 0.50A
–38 Vdc to –60 Vdc, 0.25A
–38 Vdc to –60 Vdc, 0.25A
–48 Vdc
–48 Vdc Redundant
POWER CONSUMPTION
AND DISSIPATION
3160:
6.5 watts, 22.1 Btu per hour at +24 Vdc;
6.2 watts, 21.3 Btu per hour at –48 Vdc
8.7 watts, 29.7 Btu per hour at 100 Vac (includes
external transformer)
9.2 watts, 31.4 Btu per hour at 120 Vac (includes
external transformer)
3164, 3165:
12.0 watts, 41 Btu per hour at +24 and -48 Vdc
16.0 watts, 55.0 Btu per hour at 115 Vac (includes
external transformer)
ENVIRONMENT
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity Shock and
Vibration
32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C)
–4°F to 158°F (–20°C to 70°C)
5%—95% (noncondensing)
Withstands normal shipping and handling
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. Technical Specifications
Table B-1. Models 3160/3164/3165/DSU/CSU’s Technical Specifications
Specifications
Criteria
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS
Height
Model 3160 or 3165 DSU/CSU = 2.13 inches (5.4 cm)
Model 3164 DSU/CSU = 3.90 inches (10.0 cm)
Width
Depth
7.63 inches (19.4 cm)
12.13 inches (30.8 cm)
WEIGHT
Model 3160 DSU/CSU = 2.6 pounds (1.2 kg)
Model 3164 DSU/CSU = 3.6 pounds (1.7 kg)
Model 3165 DSU/CSU = 2.4 pounds (1.1 kg)
DTE DROP/INSERT
(DSX-1) INTERFACE
(Models 3160/3164)
Physical Interface
Framing Format
Coding Format
DTE Line Equalization
Send AIS
DB15 socket
D4, ESF
AMI, B8ZS
5 selectable ranges from 0 to 655 feet
(0 to 196.5 meters)
Selectable
NETWORK T1 INTERFACE
Physical Interface (USA)
Physical Interface (Canada)
Framing Format
RJ48C
CA81A using adapter cable
D4, ESF
Coding Format
AMI, B8ZS
Line Build-Out (LBO)
ANSI PRM
0.0 dB, –7.5 dB, –15 dB, –22.5 dB
Selectable
Bit Stuffing
Yellow Alarm Generation
FCC Part 68, AT&T TR 62411
Selectable
LOOPBACKS
Standard Additional
AT&T TR 54016, AT&T TR 62411, ANSI T1.403.1989
RLB (Repeater Loopback), DLB (DTE Loopback),
V.54 Loop 2 and Loop 3, ANSI T1.403 Annex B
Fractional T1 Loopback
PORT INTERFACE
Standards
Rates
EIA-530-A, V.35, RS-449, X.21
Nx64 – 64K–1.536 Mb
Nx56 – 56K–1.344 Mb
APPROVALS
Refer to the product labeling
CLOCKING SOURCES
T1 network interface, Port 1, internal clock, or (for
Models 3160/3164 DSU/CSUs) DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface or external clock
MODEM INTERFACE
Physical Interface
Rate
Integral Dial Modem
RJ11C (USA), CA11A (Canada)
2400 bps
V.22
B-2
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
C
Overview
The DSU/CSU configuration option tables contain a list of all configuration options
and their available selections. The configuration options are arranged into
functional groups:
DTE Interface Configuration Options
The DTE Interface configuration options configure the DTE Drop/Insert
Options).
Port Configuration Options
The Port configuration options configure the synchronous data ports on the
Network Interface Configuration Options
The Network Interface configuration options configure the network interface on
Channel Configuration Options
The Channel configuration options configure the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) and
General Configuration Options
The General configuration options configure alarms and clocks on the
User Interface Configuration Options
The User Interface configuration options configure and control the DSU/CSU
Alarm Configuration Options
The Alarm configuration options specify how alarm conditions are handled by
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Management Configuration Options
The Management configuration options configure the DSU/CSU for SNMP or
The configuration tables include a description of each configuration function and
its available selections. In the tables, the top line of each configuration option
entry indicates the factory default setting.
DTE Interface Configuration Options
NOTE:
These configuration options are only available for 2-port and 4-port
DSU/CSUs.
Table C-1. DTE Interface Configuration Options (1 of 2)
DTE Port: Enab
Next Enab Disab Prev
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Port. Enables the use of the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) port.
Enab – Allows the use of the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Disab – Prohibits the use of the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
NOTE: When this configuration option is disabled, you cannot display or configure any
other DTE Interface configuration options. If the clock source configuration option is
set to DTE, it is changed to NET.
DTE Framing: ESF (Factory 1) D4 (Factory 2)
Next D4 ESF Prev
DTE Line Framing Format. Designates the framing format for the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface.
D4 – Configures for the D4 framing format.
ESF – Configures for the Extended Superframe framing format.
DTE Coding: B8ZS (Factory 1) AMI (Factory 2)
Next AMI B8ZS Prev
DTE Line Coding Format. Designates the line coding format to be used on the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
AMI – Uses the Alternate Mark Inversion coding format.
B8ZS – Uses the Bipolar 8 Zero Suppression coding format.
Equal: 0—133
Next 0—133 133—266 266—399 399—533 533—655 Prev
DTE Line Equalization. Specifies the DTE line equalization compensation parameters that
permit a standard DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) signal to be delivered over a distance of up to
655 feet.
C-2
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-1. DTE Interface Configuration Options (2 of 2)
Extrn DLB: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
DTE Loopback on External Contact. Allows the control of a DTE Loopback (DLB) by an
external contact on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Enab – Allows the DSU/CSU to begin a DLB when the external contact is closed. The
DSU/CSU remains in DLB as long as the contact remains closed.
Disab – Prevents the state of the external contact from affecting the operation of DLB.
Send Ones: Enab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Send All Ones on DTE Failure. Specifies the action to take on the signal transmitted to the
network when a valid signal cannot be recovered from the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface (due to an LOS, OOF, or AIS condition).
Enab – Sends all ones on the DS0 channels allocated to the network interface when an
LOS, AIS, or OOF condition occurs on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Disab – Passes the data unchanged to the network interface channels.
Port Configuration Options
Table C-2. Port Configuration Options (1 of 5)
Port Type: E530 (Factory 1) V.35 (Factory 2)
Next E530 V.35 RS449 X.21 Prev
Data Port Type. Allows selection of the data port interface type.
E530 – Configures the port as an EIA-530-A compatible interface. EIA-530-A DTEs can
be directly connected to a port connector on the back of the DSU/CSU.
V.35 – Configures the port as a V.35 compatible interface. V.35 DTEs can be connected to
a port connector using an EIA-530-A-to-V.35 adapter.
RS449 – Configures the port as an RS-449 compatible interface. RS-449 DTEs can be
connected to a port connector using an EIA-530-A-to-RS-449 adapter.
X.21 – Configures the port as an X.21 compatible interface. X.21 DTEs can be connected
to a port connector using an EIA-530-A-to-X.21 adapter.
NOTE: If this configuration option is set to X.21, set the All Ones configuration option to
RTS or Disab.
Base Rate: Nx64
Next Nx64 Nx56 Prev
Data Port Base Rate. Allows selection of the base rate for the data port. The data rate for
the port is a multiple (from 1 to 24) of the base rate specified with this configuration option.
Nx64 – Sets the base rate for this port to 64 kbps. The data rate is Nx64 kbps, where N is
a number from 1 to 24.
Nx56 – Sets the base rate for this port to 56 kbps. The data rate is Nx56 kbps, where N is
a number from 1 to 24.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-2. Port Configuration Options (2 of 5)
Net DCLB: Disab (Factory 1) Both (Factory 2)
Next Disab V.54 FT1 Both Prev
Network Initiated DCLB. Allows the initiation and termination of a Data Channel Loopback
(V.54 loop 2) by the receipt of a V.54 DCLB-actuate sequence or DCLB-release sequence
from the network or far-end device. The sequences may be either V.54 or FT1 (ANSI)
compliant sequences.
Disab – Ignores the DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences for this port.
V.54 – Enables DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences that comply with the V.54
standard for “Inter-DCE signaling for point to point circuits.”
FT1 – Enables DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences that comply with the ANSI
T1.403, Annex B standard for “In-band signaling for fractional-T1 (FT1) channel
loopbacks.”
Both – Enables DCLB-actuate and DCLB-release sequences that comply with either the
ANSI or V.54 standard. The type of actuate and release sequences do not have to match.
Port LB: Disab (Factory 1) Both (Factory 2)
Next Disab DTLB DCLB Both Prev
Port (DTE) Initiated Loopbacks. Allows the initiation and termination of a local Data
Terminal Loopback (DTLB) or remote Data Channel Loopback (DCLB) by the DTE
connected to this port. (DTLB is equivalent to a V.54 loop 3, and DCLB is equivalent to a
V.54 loop 2.) Control of these loopbacks is through the DTE interchange circuits as
specified by the V.54 standard.
Disab – Disables control of local DTLBs and remote DCLBs by the DTE connected to this
port.
DTLB – Gives control of the local DTLBs for this port to the DTE attached to this port. This
loopback is controlled by the Local Loopback interchange circuit LL (CCITT 141).
DCLB – Gives control of the remote DCLBs for the far-end port connected to this port to
the DTE attached to this port. This loopback is controlled by the Remote Loopback
interchange circuit RL (CCITT 140). The far-end equipment must support in-band V.54
loopbacks.
Both – Gives control of local DTLBs and remote DCLBs to the DTE connected to this
port.
All Ones: Both
Next Disab DTR RTS Both Prev
Send All Ones on Data Port Not Ready. Specifies the conditions on the data port that
determine when valid data is not being sent from the DTE. When this condition is
detected, all ones are sent to the network on the DS0 channels allocated to the port.
Disab – Disables the monitoring of interchange circuits from the DTE connected to this
port.
DTR – Monitors the DTE Ready interchange circuit CD (CCITT 108/1/2). When DTR is
interrupted, all ones are sent to the network.
RTS – Monitors the Request-to-Send interchange circuit CA (CCITT 105). When RTS is
interrupted, all ones are sent to the network.
Both – Monitors both DTR and RTS. If either is interrupted, all ones are sent to the
network.
NOTE: If the Port Type configuration option is set to X.21, set this configuration option
to RTS or Disab.
C-4
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-2. Port Configuration Options (3 of 5)
Rcv Yellow: Halt
Next None Halt Prev
Action on Network Yellow Alarm. Specifies the action taken on this port when a Yellow
Alarm is received on the network interface.
None – Makes the data port unaffected by Yellow Alarms received on the network
interface.
Halt – Stops the transmission of data on the port and disables the data port when Yellow
Alarms are received on the network interface. When Yellow Alarms are received, all ones
are sent on the Received Data interchange circuit BB (CCITT 104). The Clear-to-Send
interchange circuit CB (CCITT 106) is interrupted.
Tx Clock: Int
Next Int Ext Prev
Data Port Transmit Clock. Specifies whether the transmitted data for the port is clocked
using an internal clock provided by the DSU/CSU (synchronized to the clock source
specified by the clock source configuration option in the General configuration option
group) or an external clock provided by the DTE connected to the port. When an external
clock is used, it must be synchronized to the same clock source as the DSU/CSU.
Int – Indicates the clock is provided internally by the DSU/CSU on the TXC interchange
circuit DB (CCITT 114).
Ext – Indicates the clock is provided externally by the DTE on the XTXC interchange
circuit DA (CCITT 113). Use this selection when the clock source is set to this data port.
InvertTxC: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Invert Transmit Clock. Specifies whether the clock supplied by the DSU/CSU on the TXC
interchange circuit DB (CCITT 114) is phase inverted with respect to the Transmitted Data
interchange circuit BA (CCITT 103). This configuration option is useful when long cable
lengths between the DSU/CSU and the DTE are causing data errors.
Enab – Indicates TXC supplied by the DSU/CSU on this port is phase inverted.
Disab – Indicates TXC supplied by the DSU/CSU on this port is not phase inverted.
InvrtData: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Invert Transmitted and Received Data. Specifies whether the port’s transmitted data and
received data are logically inverted before being transmitted or received. This
configuration option is useful for applications where HDLC data is being transported.
Inverting the data ensures that the density requirements for the network interface are met.
Enab – Indicates the transmitted data and received data for this port are inverted.
Disab – Indicates the transmitted data and received data for this port are not inverted.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-2. Port Configuration Options (4 of 5)
EDL: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Embedded Data Link. Specifies whether Embedded Data Link (EDL) is enabled for a
particular port. If EDL is enabled, then 8 kbps of the total bandwidth allocated for this port
is not available to the synchronous data port. For exampl“e, if the port rate is 256 kbps
(4 DS0 channels allocated) and EDL is enabled, then only 248 kbps is available to the
port. EDL provides the following: detection of frame synchronization, CRC of the data
stream (excluding the 8 kbps EDL), and an in-band data link (4 kbps) between the local
and remote units. The 4 kbps in-band data link can be used for performance report
messages and as an IP link for SNMP or Telnet sessions.
Enab – Indicates the port’s EDL is enabled.
Disab – Indicates the port’s EDL is disabled.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is only available on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.
– If the local DSU/CSU’s EDL is enabled, then the remote DSU/CSU’s EDL must also
be enabled.
– EDL is not recommended for networks in which data is examined for routing
purposes (e.g., frame relay, x.25).
Err Rate: 10E-4
Next 10E-4 10E-5 10E-6 10E-7 10E-8 10E-9 Prev
Port Excessive Error Rate Threshold. Sets the error rate threshold that determines when
an Excessive Error Rate (EER) condition is declared for a particular port. The error rate
selected by this configuration option is determined by the ratio of the number of CRC5
errors to the total number of bits received over a set period of time.
10E-4 – 10E-4 Threshold. For example, at 1536 kbps, EER is declared if more than
1,535 CRC5 errors are detected in a 10-second period. It is cleared with less than
1,536 errors in ten seconds.
10E-5 – 10E-5 Threshold. For example, at 1536 kbps, EER is declared if more than
921 CRC5 errors are detected in a 60-second period. It is cleared with less than
922 errors in sixty seconds.
10E-6 – 10E-6 Threshold. For example, at 1536 kbps, EER is declared if more than
92 CRC5 errors are detected in a 60-second period. It is cleared with less than 93 errors
in sixty seconds.
10E-7 – 10E-7 Threshold. For example, at 1536 kbps, EER is declared if more than
9 CRC5 errors are detected in a 60-second period. It is cleared with less than 10 errors in
sixty seconds.
10E-8 – 10E-8 Threshold. For example, at 1536 kbps, EER is declared if more than
41 CRC5 errors are detected in three 15-minute intervals. It is cleared with less than
42 errors in three 15-minute intervals.
10E-9 – 10E-9 Threshold. For example, at 1536 kbps, EER is declared if more than
4 CRC5 errors are detected in three 15-minute intervals. It is cleared with less than
5 errors in three 15-minute intervals.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is only available on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.
– This configuration option is not available if EDL is disabled.
C-6
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-2. Port Configuration Options (5 of 5)
Near-end: Disab
Next Disab Maint Send Both Prev
Near-End Performance Statistics. Specifies whether the DSU/CSU maintains near-end
performance statistics and sends performance report messages (PRMs) for a particular
port.
Disab – Disables near-end performance statistics and does not send PRMs.
Maint – Maintains near-end performance statistics for this port.
Send – Sends PRMs over the port’s EDL every second. Each PRM contains the
performance statistics for the previous 4 seconds.
Both – Maintains near-end performance statistics and sends PRMs over the port’s EDL.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is only available on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.
– This configuration option is not available if EDL is disabled.
– If the local DSU/CSU is configured to send near-end performance statistics, then
the remote device must be configured to maintain far-end performance statistics.
Far-end: Disab
Next Disab Maint Prev
Far-End Performance Statistics. Specifies whether to monitor for far-end performance
report messages (PRMs) and maintain far-end performance registers for a particular port.
Disab – Disables far-end performance statistics.
Maint – Monitors the port’s EDL for PRMs and maintains far-end performance statistics.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is only available on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.
– This configuration option is not available if EDL is disabled.
– If the local DSU/CSU is configured to maintain far-end performance statistics, then
the remote device must be configured to send near-end performance statistics.
Mgmt Link: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
EDL Management Link. Specifies whether the EDL management link is enabled for a
particular port. Selecting Enab allows SNMP or Telnet traffic to flow over the 4 kbps
in-band data link provided by EDL.
Enab – Enables the port’s EDL management link.
Disab – Disables the port’s EDL management link.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is only available on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.
– This configuration option is not available if EDL is disabled or the FDL is enabled.
– If the local DSU/CSU’s EDL is enabled, then the remote device’s EDL must also be
enabled.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Network Interface Configuration Options
Table C-3. Network Interface Configuration Options (1 of 3)
NET Framing: ESF (Factory 1) D4 (Factory 2)
Next D4 ESF Prev
Network Line Framing Format. The framing format to be used on the network interface.
D4 – Configures for the D4 framing format.
ESF – Configures for the Extended Superframe format.
NET Coding: B8ZS (Factory 1) AMI (Factory 2)
Next AMI B8ZS Prev
Network Line Coding Format. The line coding format to be used on the network interface.
AMI – Configures for the Alternate Mark Inversion coding format.
B8ZS – Configures for the Bipolar 8 Zero Suppression coding format.
LBO: 0.0
Next 0.0 –7.5 –15 –22.5 Prev
Line Build Out. The line build out (LBO) for the signal transmitted to the network (0.0 dB is
the factory default).
ANSI PRM: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Generate ANSI Performance Report Messages. Specifies whether ANSI T1.403
compliant performance report messages (PRMs) are generated.
Enab – Generates and sends ANSI PRMs over the FDL every second.
Disab – Prevents the DSU/CSU from generating ANSI PRMs.
NOTE: This configuration option is only available if the framing format is set to ESF.
Mgmt Link: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
FDL Management Link. Specifies whether Facility Data Link (FDL) is enabled. Selecting
Enab allows SNMP or Telnet traffic to flow over the 4 kbps data link provided by FDL.
Running SNMP or Telnet over FDL requires an end-to-end FDL connection and cannot be
terminated within the network.
Enab – Enables the FDL management link for SNMP or Telnet.
Disab – Disables the FDL management link.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is only available if the framing format is set to ESF.
– This configuration option is not available if EDL is enabled.
– If the local DSU/CSU’s FDL is enabled, the remote DSU/CSU’s FDL must also be
enabled.
C-8
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-3. Network Interface Configuration Options (2 of 3)
NET LLB: Enab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Network Initiated Line Loopback (LLB). Allows initiation and termination of the LLB to be
controlled by the receipt of LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release commands from the network
(or remote DSU/CSU).
Enab – Causes the DSU/CSU to enter an LLB (if the DSU/CSU can perform an LLB in its
current state) and to cause an LLB-Release command to terminate the LLB.
Disab – Causes the DSU/CSU to ignore LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release commands (the
DSU/CSU is not in compliance with ANSI T1.403 and AT&T TR 62411).
NOTE: When this configuration option is enabled, the DSU/CSU recognizes the
in-band LLB-Actuate and LLB-Release codes specified by AT&T as well as the
bit-oriented FDL messages specified by ANSI (for ESF only).
NET PLB: Enab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Network Initiated Payload Loopback (PLB). Allows initiation and termination of the PLB to
be controlled by the receipt of PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release commands from the
network (or remote DSU/CSU).
Enab – Causes the DSU/CSU to enter a PLB (if the DSU/CSU can perform a PLB in its
current state) and to cause a PLB-Release command to terminate the PLB.
Disab – Causes the DSU/CSU to ignore PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release commands (the
DSU/CSU is not in compliance with ANSI T1.403 and AT&T TR 54016).
NOTES:
– When this configuration option is enabled, the DSU/CSU recognizes the in-band
PLB-Actuate and PLB-Release codes specified by AT&T as well as the bit-oriented
FDL messages specified by ANSI.
– This configuration option is only available when the network interface framing is set
to ESF.
Bit Stuff: 62411
Next 62411 Part68 Disab Prev
Bit Stuffing. Determines when bit stuffing is performed to meet the ones density
requirements for data transmission on the network. You must choose the maximum
number of consecutive zeros the DSU/CSU can receive before it inserts a one.
62411 – Specifies that a one be inserted in the data stream after 15 consecutive zeros or
when the density of ones falls below 12.5% (complies with AT&T TR 62411).
Part68 – Specifies that a one be inserted in the data stream after 80 consecutive zeros
(complies with FCC Part 68).
Disab – Disables bit stuffing so that ones density is not enforced.
NOTES:
– To comply with Canadian DOC CS-03 regulations, equipment installed in Canada
must be configured to select 62411.
– To comply with USA Part 68 regulations, equipment installed in the USA must be
configured to select Part 68.
– This configuration option is only available if the network interface line coding format
is set to AMI.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-3. Network Interface Configuration Options (3 of 3)
Circuit Ident:
Next Edit Clear Prev
Network Circuit Identifier. Specifies the transmission vendor’s circuit identifier for the
purpose of facilitating troubleshooting. The network circuit identifier is an ASCII text string
that may be up to 255 characters in length.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the network circuit identifier using the generic text
string entry screen.
Clear – Allows you to clear the network circuit identifier. The network circuit identifier is set
to a null string.
Channel Configuration Options
The Channel configuration options are divided into two tables as follows:
NOTE:
Channel Configuration Options, describe the DTE channel and data port
Channel Configuration Options, only appear if the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
port is enabled and you are using a 2-port or 4-port DSU/CSU.
C-10
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-4. DTE Channel Configuration Options
DTE Channels:
Assign Voice
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Channel. Assigns DS0 channels from the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface to DS0 channels on the network interface, and specifies which DS0
channels carry voice signaling information.
Assign – Assigns DS0 channels from the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface to the
network interface.
Voice – Specifies which DS0 channels from the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface are
voice channels and should pass Robbed Bit Signaling (RBS) information to the network
interface.
N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 ... N24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
...
-
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Channel Allocation. Assigns DS0 channels from the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface to the network interface.
Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the network interface. Line 2 displays what is allocated
to the DS0 channel indicated in Line 1. Possible values for Line 2 are:
Value
Meaning
–
This DS0 channel is not allocated. You can modify this value on
this screen.
Prtn
Dn
This DS0 channel is allocated to port n, where n is a number from
1 to 4. You cannot modify this value on this screen.
This DS0 channel is allocated to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface DS0 channel n, where n is a number from 1 to 24. You
can modify this value on this screen.
Assign DTE channels to network channels by pressing the Function key below the
network channel desired. The DTE channel number scrolls up one number each time you
press the Function key. Only unassigned DTE channels appear during scrolling.
D1
D2
D3 D4 D5
D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12 D13 ... D24
RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS RBS ... RBS
Specify DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Voice Channels. Specifies which DS0 channels from the
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface are voice channels and should pass Robbed Bit
Signaling information to the network interface.
Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. Line 2 displays
whether the DS0 channel indicated in Line 1 is a voice or data channel. Possible values
for Line 2 are:
Value
Meaning
RBS
This DS0 channel is a voice channel carrying RBS information.
When this DS0 channel is assigned to a network DS0 channel,
RBS information is preserved across the connection.
Data
This DS0 channel is a data channel that does not contain RBS
information. Signaling is not preserved across the connection.
Press the Function key below the desired channel to toggle between RBS and Data.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-5. Data Port Channel Configuration Options (1 of 4)
Channel Config:
Dsply Clear DTE Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4
_______________________
NOTE: The configuration options described in this table are made available by
Channel Configuration Options, describes the DTE configuration options. For
information about the operation of Display and Clear, refer to Configuring DS0
Data Port Channel. Allows the assignment of a particular port to DS0 channels on either
the network interface, the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, or another port (see the
Assign To configuration option below).
NOTE: For 2-port DSU/CSUs, only Ports 1 and 2 are available; for 1-port DSU/CSUs,
only Port 1 is available, and only the Port Rate configuration option appears if you
select this port.
Assign To: NET
Next NET DTE Prtn Prtn Prtn Prev
Data Port Channel Allocation Destination. Allows you to assign this port to DS0 channels
on either the network interface, the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, or another port.
NET – Assigns this port to DS0 channels on the network interface.
DTE – Assigns this port to DS0 channels on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. If the
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface is disabled, this selection does not appear.
Prtn – Assigns this port to another port, where n is the port number of all available ports
except the port selected from the Channel Config screen. For example, if you select Prt1
from the Channel Config screen, Prt2, Prt3, and Prt4 appear for 4-port DSU/CSUs. Use
this feature to designate a port as a backup port. You can attach an external backup
device to Prtn and manually assign the selected port to the backup port (i.e., route data
from the selected port to the backup port). When a port is assigned to another port, DSR
is turned on. Selecting Prtn and Next takes you directly to the Port Rate configuration
option, bypassing the Assign By configuration option. EDL (for 2-port and 4-port
DSU/CSUs) does not operate when a synchronous data port is assigned to another
synchronous data port. Therefore, if EDL is enabled, it is ignored.
NOTE: Changing this configuration option from one T1 interface to the other (NET or
DTE) deallocates all DS0 channels assigned to the previous interface.
Assign By: Block
Next Block ACAMI Chan Prev
Data Port Channel Allocation Method. If NET or DTE is selected using the Assign To
configuration option, this configuration option designates the method for assigning DS0
channels to the destination T1 interface.
Block – Allocates DS0 channels to this port by the block method.
ACAMI – Allocates DS0 channels to this port by the Alternate Channel Alternate Mark
Inversion method. The difference between block and ACAMI is that the number of
channels allocated with ACAMI is double the number needed for the port rate. With
ACAMI, every alternate DS0 channel does not carry data from the port but always
transmits and receives all ones.
Chan – Allocates DS0 channels to this port by the individual channel method.
NOTE: Changing this configuration option from one method to another (Block, ACAMI,
or Chan) deallocates all DS0 channels assigned to either the network interface or the
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
C-12
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-5. Data Port Channel Configuration Options (2 of 4)
Port Rate: 384
Next 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768
832 896 960 1024 1088 1152 1216 1280 1344 1408 1472 1536 Prev
OR
Next 56 112 168 224 280 336 392 448 504 560 616 672
728 784 840 896 952 1008 1064 1120 1176 1232 1288 1344 Prev
Data Port Rate (appears when using the block or ACAMI channel allocation method, or
when a synchronous data port is assigned to another synchronous data port). Designates
the data rate for the port. Available selections depend on the current base rate configured
for the port. The factory default for Nx64 is 384 kbps, and Nx56 is 336 kbps.
NOTES:
– This configuration option does not appear if the individual channel allocation
method (Chan) is selected using the Assign By configuration option.
– Changing this configuration option from one rate to another deallocates all DS0
channels assigned to either the network interface or the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface.
– When you enable EDL (for 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs), 8 kbps of the total
bandwidth allocated for this port is not available to the synchronous data port. For
example, if you select 256 kbps and EDL is enabled, only 248 kbps are available.
– When you enable EDL (for 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs) on a synchronous data
port and the clock source is set to that synchronous data port, the external device
must provide a clock of 8 kbps less than the expected data port rate. For example, if
you select 64 kbps, the external clock source must supply a 56 kbps clock signal.
– For the 3164 DSU/CSU there is a hardware limitation that limits the combined
bandwidth used by Port 1 and Port 3 to a total of 2048 kbps and the combined
bandwidth used by Port 2 and Port 4 to 2048 kbps. Thus, when entering this menu,
the rate choices are limited due to this constraint. This limitation only occurs in
configurations mapping a port to a port or when mapping ports to the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface and to the network.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-5. Data Port Channel Configuration Options (3 of 4)
Start At:
Next Clear N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 ...
N24 Prev
OR
Start At:
Next Clear D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 ...
D24 Prev
Data Port Channel Allocation (appears for the block and ACAMI methods only).
Designates the starting DS0 channel, N1–N24 for the network interface and D1–D24 for
the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Available selections are only those DS0 channels that provide enough bandwidth (based
on the configured data rate) to be used as a starting channel number.
Select the desired starting channel number by pressing the Function key under that
number. When you make the selection, the DSU/CSU allocates the correct amount of
DS0 channels to support the data rate currently configured for the port.
Clear – Deallocates all DS0 channels for this port from the network interface or the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the individual channel allocation
method (Chan) is selected using the Assign By configuration option, or if Prtn is
selected using the Assign To configuration option.
C-14
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-5. Data Port Channel Configuration Options (4 of 4)
N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 ... N24
Next
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
... Prev
OR
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 ... D24
-- ... Prev
Next
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Data Port Channel Allocation (appears for the individual channel method only).
Designates the DS0 channel to allocate to this port, N1–N24 for the network interface and
D1-D24 for the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Line 1 displays the 24 channels for the network interface or the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface. Line 2 displays what is allocated to the DS0 channel indicated in Line 1.
Possible values for Line 2 are:
Value
Meaning
–
This DS0 channel is not allocated. You can modify this value on this
screen.
Prtn
Nn
This DS0 channel is allocated to port n, where n is a number from
1 to 4. You cannot modify this value on this screen for this port only.
This DS0 channel is allocated to the network interface DS0
channel n, where n is a number from 1 to 24. You cannot modify this
value on this screen.
Dn
This DS0 channel is allocated to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface DS0 channel n, where n is a number from 1 to 24. You can
modify this value on this screen.
Select the channel by pressing the Function key under that number. To deallocate a port,
press the Function key under that port number. Pressing the Function key under channels
assigned to other ports has no effect.
NOTES:
– The DSU/CSU automatically derives the data rate for the port from the number of
DS0 channels allocated.
– For the 3164 DSU/CSU there is a hardware limitation that limits the combined
bandwidth used by Port 1 and Port 3 to a total of 2048 kbps and the combined
bandwidth used by Port 2 and Port 4 to 2048 kbps. If a selection of Prtn causes this
limit to be exceeded, the selection is ignored and the “-” continues to be displayed
for the channel.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
General Configuration Options
Table C-6. General Configuration Options (1 of 2)
Gen Yellow: Enab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Generate Yellow Alarm Signals. Determines whether the DSU/CSU generates Yellow
Alarm signals on the network and DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interfaces.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available for 1-port DSU/CSUs or if the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Interface is disabled. If the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface is
disabled, the DSU/CSU always generates the Yellow Alarm signal on the network
interface.
Enab – Generates the Yellow Alarm signal for both the network and DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interfaces.
Disab – Disables the Yellow Alarm signal. When this configuration option is disabled,
Yellow Alarm conditions on the network interface cause an AIS signal to be transmitted on
the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
NOTE: When this configuration option is disabled, the DTE equipment connected to
the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface is responsible for generation of the Yellow Alarm
signal on the network interface. In this case, the interface port marked DTE must only
be connected to an FCC Part 68 Registered (for USA) and Canadian DOC Certified
(for Canada) Digital Service Unit or System, such as PBX, with a DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface. Failure to do so is a violation of FCC Rules or DOC Regulations.
Clock Src: NET
Next NET DTE Prt1 Int Ext Prev
DSU/CSU Clock Source. Specifies the master clock source for the DSU/CSU. This
selection synchronizes all internal timing and external interface clocks. The clock rate(s)
for the external timing interfaces are independent of the input rate for the master clock.
Failure of the clock specified by the Clock Source selection results in automatic fallback to
internal clock.
NET – Configures the network interface as the master clock source.
DTE – Configures the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface as the master clock source. This
selection is not available for 1-port DSU/CSUs or if the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface
is disabled. If the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface is disabled after making this
selection, the master clock source is changed to NET.
Prt1 – Configures data port 1 as the master clock source. This is the only synchronous
data port you can use for the master clock. If you enable EDL if for Port 1 and the
DSU/CSU Clock Source is set to Prt1, the external device must provide clocking of
8 kbps less than the expected data port rate. For example, if you select 64 kbps, the
external clock must supply a 56 kbps clock signal.
Int – Configures the internal clock as the master clock source.
Ext – Configures an external clock (provided through the Clock In connector) as the
master clock source. This selection is only available on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.
C-16
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-6. General Configuration Options (2 of 2)
Clock Rate: 1544
Next 2048 1544
8
Prev
External Clock Rate. Specifies the clock rate when the master clock source is configured
for external clock (Ext). This configuration option does not appear when the clock source
is not an external clock.
2048 – Sets the input rate of the external clock to 2,048 kHz.
1544 – Sets the input rate of the external clock to 1,544 kHz.
8 – Sets the input rate of the external clock to 8 kHz.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is only available on 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs.
– External clock rate 2,048 kHz does not imply E1 compatibility.
Tst Timeout: Enab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Test Timeout. Specifies whether user-initiated loopback and pattern tests have durations
that are specified by the Tst Duration configuration option.
Enab – Loopback and pattern tests initiated on the DSU/CSU have specified durations.
Disab – Disables test timeout. The tests are terminated manually.
NOTE: For DSU/CSUs that are remotely managed through an inband data stream
such as EDL or FDL, the recommended setting is Enab. If tests are inadvertently left in
the active state, the Enab setting will allow the test to timeout (terminate) after a
specified time.
Tst Duration: 10
Next Up Down Save Prev
Test Duration. Specifies the duration (1 to 120 minutes) of user-initiated loopback and
pattern tests. (The Tst Timeout configuration option must be set to Enab.) Use the left or
right arrow key to position the cursor on the digit you want to change. Use the Function
keys (Up or Down) to increment or decrement the digit.
Up – Increments the test duration.
Down – Decrements the test duration.
Save – Stores the test duration.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
User Interface Configuration Options
NOTE:
A circular symbol (❚) identifies configuration options that are available on
standalone DSU/CSUs only. A triangular symbol (❚) identifies configuration
options that are available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only.
Table C-7. User Interface Configuration Options (1 of 10)
Self-Test: Enab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Initial Self-Test. Specifies whether the DSU/CSU performs a device self-test at power-up
and after a device reset.
Enab – Enables a self-test.
Disab – Disables the self-test.
FP Access: Enab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Front Panel Access. Determines whether front panel access or display is allowed at the
DSU/CSU.
Enab – Allows the front panel to access and display data.
Disab – Prevents the access and display of data.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
FP Pass: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Front Panel Pass-Through. Allows dial-out access to a remote DSU/CSU using the front
panel pass-through operation.
Enab – Allows dial-out access to a remote DSU/CSU.
Disab – Prevents dial-out access to a remote DSU/CSU.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
Dial-In: Enab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Dial-in Access. Allows dial-in access to the DSU/CSU. For standalone DSU/CSUs, dial-in
access is through the modem port. For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, dial-in access is
through an external device that is connected to the communication port.
Enab – Allows dial-in access to the DSU/CSU.
Disab – Prevents dial-in access. Incoming calls to the DSU/CSU are not answered.
NOTE: To enable Dial-In for carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, the external device must be
configured for automatic answer and the ComExtDev configuration option must be
enabled.
C-18
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-7. User Interface Configuration Options (2 of 10)
Password: None
Next None Com Modem Both Prev
Password Mode. Activates a password prompt that prevents access until a password is
entered.
None – Does not require a password.
Com – Prompts the communications port user to enter a password.
Modem – Prompts the remote modem port user to enter a password. This selection is
available on standalone DSU/CSUs only.
Both – Prompts both the communications port user and the remote modem port user to
enter a password. This selection is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only.
Com Port: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Setting the Carrier Communication Port. Enables the use of the communication port in
carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs.
Enab – This communication port is enabled.
Disab – The communication port is disabled.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ❚
Com Use: ASCII
Next Mgmt ASCII Daisy Term Prev
Communication Port Use. Specifies how the communication port is used.
Mgmt – Configures the communication port as the link to an SNMP or Telnet system.
ASCII – Configures the communication port as a proprietary ASCII port supporting Front
Panel Emulation software and ASCII alarm messages. Only one ASCII communication
port is allowed per 3000 Series carrier.
Daisy – Configures the communication port as an SNMP or Telnet port that is daisy
chained to the auxiliary port of an another 31xx Series device. This selection is available
on standalone DSU/CSUs only.
Term – Configures the communication port as the interface to an async terminal.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-7. User Interface Configuration Options (3 of 10)
ComExtDev: Disab
Next Disab AT Other Prev
Carrier Communication Port’s External Device Commands. Specifies the communication
port’s external device commands. When this configuration option is disabled, no
commands are sent out the communication port. Select AT to have standard attention (AT)
commands sent out the communication port to control the external device. Select Other to
configure the connect prefix, the connect indication string, the escape sequence, the
escape sequence delay, and the disconnect string.
Disab – Allows no commands to be sent out the communication port.
AT – Allows standard AT commands to be sent out the communication port.
Other – Allows user configurable commands to be sent out the communication port.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ❚
– This configuration option is not available if the communications port is disabled.
– Carrier Detect (CD) is used to detect that the external device’s connection is lost.
Therefore, do not allow the CD lead to be forced on by the external device.
– The external device should be strapped to ignore Data Terminal Ready (DTR).
ComConnPrefix:
Next Edit Clear Prev
Carrier Communication Port Connect Prefix. Specifies the connect prefix to the dial
directory phone number. When you make a connection or the DSU/CSU automatically
makes a connection (dial-out alarms or traps) through the communication port, the
connect prefix and the dial directory phone number are used to establish the connection.
The connect prefix is an ASCII text string and may be up to 20 characters in length. If the
connect prefix is NULL, then no connect prefix is used.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the connect prefix using the generic text string
entry screen.
Clear – Allows you to clear the connect prefix. The connect prefix is set to a null string.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ❚
– This configuration option is not available if the ComExtDev configuration option is
set to AT or the communication port is disabled.
– If ComExtDev is configured for Other and the external device requires characters
after the dial phone number, you must append the characters to the phone number.
C-20
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-7. User Interface Configuration Options (4 of 10)
ComConnected:
Next Edit Clear Prev
Carrier Communication Port Connect Indication String. Specifies the communication
port’s connect indication string. When you make a connection or the DSU/CSU
automatically makes a connection (dial-out alarms or traps) through the communication
port, this string determines that the connection has been established. The connect
indication string is an ASCII text string and may be up to 20 characters in length. If the
connect indication string is not received within 1 minute, it will time-out the connection. If
the connect indication string is NULL, the communication port’s receive data stream is not
searched and a transition in the Carrier Detect (CD) lead is used to determine that a
connection has been established.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the case-sensitive connect indication string using
the generic text string entry screen.
Clear – Allows you to clear the connect indication string. The connect indication string is
set to a null string.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ❚
– This configuration option is not available if the ComExtDev configuration option is
set to AT or the communication port is disabled.
ComEscapeSeq:
Next Edit Clear Prev
Carrier Communication Port Escape Sequence. Specifies the communication port’s
escape sequence. Once the external device connection has been established, either you
or the DSU/CSU can command the external device to disconnect. Before doing so, you
may need to send the escape sequence out to switch the external device into command
mode. The escape sequence is an ASCII text string and may be up to 20 characters in
length. If the escape sequence is NULL, no escape sequence is sent out.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the escape sequence using the generic text string
entry screen.
Clear – Allows you to clear the escape sequence. The escape sequence is set to a null
string.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ❚
– This configuration option is not available if the ComExtDev configuration option is
set to AT or the communication port is disabled.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-7. User Interface Configuration Options (5 of 10)
ComEscDel: None
Next None 0.2s 0.4s 0.6s 0.8s 1.0s Prev
Carrier Communication Port Escape Sequence Delay. Specifies the delay used while
sending the communication port escape sequence. Use the communication port escape
delay to specify the delay before sending the first character of the escape sequence and
the delay after the last character of the escape sequence. During the delay, no data is sent
out the communication port.
None – No communication port escape sequence delay.
X.Xs – The delay used during the communication port escape sequence (where X.X is
0.2, 0.4, 0.6, 0.8, or 1.0 seconds).
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ❚
– This configuration option is not available if the ComExtDev configuration option is
set to AT or the communication port is disabled.
– ComEscDel must be configured for a delay greater than or equal to the escape
guard time required by the external device.
ComDisconnect:
Next Edit Clear Prev
Carrier Communication Port Disconnect String. Specifies the communication port’s
disconnect string. The communication port’s disconnect string is sent to the external
device if either you or the DSU/CSU wants to command the external device to disconnect.
The external device must be in command mode before this command can be sent, so the
escape sequence will always be sent before the disconnect string. The disconnect string
is an ASCII text string and may be up to 20 characters in length. If the disconnect string is
NULL, then no disconnect string is sent out.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the disconnect string using the generic text string
entry screen.
Clear – Allows you to clear the disconnect string. The disconnect string is set to a null
string.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ❚
– This configuration option is not available if the ComExtDev configuration option is
set to AT or the communication port is disabled.
Com Type: Async
Next Async Sync Prev
Communication Port Type. Specifies whether the communication port uses synchronous
or asynchronous operation when it is configured as the SNMP management link.
Async – Configures the communication port for asynchronous operation.
Sync – Configures the communication port for synchronous operation.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
– This configuration option is not available if the Com Use configuration option is set
to ASCII, Daisy, or Term. In these cases, the communication port is always
asynchronous.
C-22
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-7. User Interface Configuration Options (6 of 10)
Com Clk: Int
Next Int Ext Prev
Communication Port Synchronous Clock. Specifies whether the communication port uses
internal or external clocking when it is configured for synchronous operation.
Int – Configures the communication port for internal clocking.
Ext – Configures the communication port for external clocking.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
– This configuration option is not available if the Com Type configuration option is set
to Async.
Com Rate: 9.6
Next 1.2 2.4 4.8 9.6 14.4 19.2 38.4 Prev
Communication Port Rate. Configures the bit rate for the communication port.
1.2 – Sets the bit rate to 1200 bps (for asynchronous operation only).
2.4 – Sets the bit rate to 2400 bps.
4.8 – Sets the bit rate to 4800 bps.
9.6 – Sets the bit rate to 9600 bps.
14.4 – Sets the bit rate to 14,400 bps.
19.2 – Sets the bit rate to 19,200 bps.
38.4 – Sets the bit rate to 38,400 bps. This rate is not supported for carrier-mounted
DSU/CSUs.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the communication port is configured
for synchronous operation and the clock source is external.
Char Length: 8
Next
7
8
Prev
Communication Port Character Length. Configures the character length (7 or 8 bits) for
the communication port.
NOTES:
– This configuration option must be set to 8 if the communication port is used as the
network communication link.
– This configuration option is not available if the communication port is configured for
synchronous operation.
CParity: None
Next None Even Odd Prev
Communication Port Parity. Configures the parity (none, even, or odd) for the
communication port.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the communication port is configured
for synchronous operation.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-7. User Interface Configuration Options (7 of 10)
CStop Bits: 1
Next
1
1.5
2
Prev
Communication Port Stop Bits. Configures the number of stop bits (1, 1.5, or 2) for the
communication port.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the communication port is configured
for synchronous operation.
Ignore DTR: No
Next Yes No Prev
Communication Port Ignore DTR State. Specifies whether the DSU/CSU ignores the state
of the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) input to the communication port.
Yes – DTR is ignored.
No – DTR is not ignored.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the communication port is configured
for synchronous operation.
CmInActTm: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Communication Port Inactivity Timeout. Specifies whether the communication port
disconnects after a period of inactivity specified by the CmDiscTm configuration option.
Enab – The communication port disconnects after the period of inactivity specified by the
CmDiscTm configuration option.
Disab – The communication port does not disconnect due to inactivity.
CmDiscTm: 5
Next Up Down Save Prev
Communication Port Disconnect Time. Specifies the period of time (1 to 60 minutes)
before the communication port disconnects due to inactivity. (The CmInActTm
configuration option must be set to Enab.) Use the left or right arrow key to position the
cursor on the digit you want to change. Use the Function keys (Up or Down) to increment
or decrement the digit.
Up – Increments the time delay.
Down – Decrements the time delay.
Save – Stores the time delay for use with inactivity disconnects.
Modem Use: ASCII
Next Mgmt ASCII Term Prev
Modem Port Use. Specifies how the modem port is used.
Mgmt – Configures the modem port as the link to an SNMP or Telnet system.
ASCII – Configures the modem port as a proprietary ASCII port. This selection supports
dial-out ASCII alarm messages and dial-in/dial-out front panel access.
Term – Configures the modem port as the interface to an async terminal.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
C-24
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-7. User Interface Configuration Options (8 of 10)
Modem Type: Async
Next Async Sync Prev
Modem Type. Specifies whether the port uses synchronous or asynchronous
communication if the modem port is configured as the SNMP management link.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
– This confBiguration option is not available if the Modem Use configuration option is
set to ASCII. In this case, the modem port is always asynchronous.
Modem Rate: 2.4
Next 1.2 2.4 Prev
Modem Port Rate. Configures the bit rate for the modem port.
1.2 – Sets the bit rate at 1200 bps.
2.4 – Sets the bit rate at 2400 bps.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
MChar Len: 8
Next
7
8
Prev
Modem Character Length. Configures the character length (number of data bits) for the
modem port. This does not include the start bit (always 1) or the stop bits; 8 is the factory
default.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
– This option must be set to 8 to perform PC emulation or pass-through operations, or
SNMP management.
MParity: None
Next None Even Odd Prev
Modem Parity. Configures the parity for the modem port. None is the factory default.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
MStop Bits: 1
Next
1
2
Prev
Modem Port Stop Bits. Configures the number of stop bits for the modem port; 1 is the
factory default.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
LSpaceDsc: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Long Space Disconnect. Specifies how the modem disconnects a call. This makes call
disconnecting more robust and prevents invalid data at the remote modem if the call is
disconnected. To be effective, the remote modem must be configured to disconnect if it
detects continuous space.
NOTES:
– This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
– This configuration option is not available if the modem port is configured as an
SNMP management link and the link is configured for synchronous operation.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-7. User Interface Configuration Options (9 of 10)
MoInActTm: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Modem Port Inactivity Timeout. Specifies whether the modem port disconnects after a
period of inactivity specified by the MoDiscTm configuration option.
Enab – The modem port disconnects after the period of inactivity specified by the
MoDiscTm configuration option.
Disab – The modem port does not disconnect due to inactivity.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
MoDiscTm: 5
Next Up Down Save Prev
Modem Port Disconnect Time. Specifies the period of time (1 to 60 minutes) before the
modem port disconnects due to inactivity. (The MoInActTm configuration option must be
set to Enab.) Use the left or right arrow key to position the cursor on the digit you want to
change. Use the Function keys (Up or Down) to increment or decrement the digit.
Up – Increments the time delay.
Down – Decrements the time delay.
Save – Stores the time delay for use with inactivity disconnects.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
Aux Use: None
Next None Mgmt Daisy Prev
Auxiliary Port Use. Specifies how the auxiliary port is used. The auxiliary port only
supports Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) with the following parameters: type is
asynchronous, character length is 8, parity is none, and stop bit is 1.
None – Specifies that the auxiliary port is not to be used.
Mgmt – Configures the auxiliary port as the link to an SNMP manager or Telnet client via
an external LAN Adapter.
Daisy – Configures the auxiliary port as an SNMP or Telnet port that is daisy chained to
the communication port of an another 31xx Series device.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
Aux Rate: 19.2
Next 9.6 14.4 19.2 38.4 Prev
Auxiliary Port Rate. Configures the bit rate for the auxiliary port.
9.6 – Configures the auxiliary port rate as 9600 bps.
14.4 – Configures the auxiliary port rate as 14,400 bps.
19.2 – Configures the auxiliary port rate as 19,200 bps.
38.4 – Configures the auxiliary port rate as 38,400 bps.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
C-26
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-7. User Interface Configuration Options (10 of 10)
TnSession: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Telnet Session Enable. Specifies whether the DSU/CSU responds to Telnet session
requests.
Enab – The DSU/CSU responds to Telnet session requests.
Disab – The DSU/CSU does not respond to Telnet session requests.
TnPaswd: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Telnet Password Mode. Specifies whether a password is required for Telnet access.
Enab – A password is required for Telnet access.
Disab – A password is not required for Telnet access.
TnInActTm: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Telnet Inactivity Timeout. Specifies whether the Telnet session disconnects after a period
of inactivity specified by the TnDiscTm configuration option.
Enab – The Telnet session disconnects after the period of inactivity specified by the
TnDiscTm configuration option.
Disab – The Telnet session does not disconnect due to inactivity.
TnDiscTm: 5
Next Up Down Save Prev
Telnet Disconnect Time. Specifies the period of time (1 to 60 minutes) before the Telnet
session disconnects due to inactivity. (The TnInActTm configuration option must be set to
Enab.) Use the left or right arrow key to position the cursor on the digit you want to
change. Use the Function keys (Up or Down) to increment or decrement the digit.
Up – Increments the time delay.
Down – Decrements the time delay.
Save – Stores the time delay for use with inactivity disconnects.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Alarm Configuration Options
NOTE:
A triangular symbol (❚) identifies a configuration option that is available on
carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only.
Table C-8. Alarm Configuration Options (1 of 4)
Alrm Msg: Disab
Next Disab Modem Com Both Prev
Alarm Messages. Controls the generation of alarm messages, which are routed to an
ASCII terminal or printer attached to the communication port and/or the modem port.
Disab – Prevents an alarm message for any alarm conditions.
Modem – Enables alarm messages routed to the modem port. This selection does not
appear on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs.
Com – Enables alarm messages routed to the communication port.
Both – Enables alarm messages routed to both the modem and communication ports.
This selection does not appear on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs.
NOTE: Alarm messages are only sent to the communication port if the Com Use
configuration option is set to ASCII, otherwise the alarm messages are discarded.
SNMP Trap: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
SNMP Trap Enable. Specifies whether SNMP trap messages are sent over the SNMP
management link.
Enab – Enables sending SNMP trap messages from this unit over any SNMP
management link.
Disab – Disables sending SNMP trap messages from this unit over any SNMP
management link.
NOTE: For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs that have the communication port enabled, the
only traps that are disabled are those that pertain to this particular unit. Traps from
other units are passed through.
Trap Disc: Enab
Next Enab Disab Prev
SNMP Trap Disconnect. Specifies whether the modem connection or carrier external
communication port device connection is disconnected after sending a trap message.
This configuration option applies only to modem connections or carrier external
communication port device connections initiated as a result of the trap message being
sent.
Enab – Specifies that the modem call or carrier external communication port device call is
disconnected after a trap message is sent.
Disab – Specifies that the modem call or carrier external communication port device call
is not disconnected after a trap message is sent. The line is held until it is manually
disconnected or disconnected by the remote modem.
NOTE: This configuration option is only available if SNMP traps are enabled and the
integral modem or the carrier external communication port device is enabled and
configured as an SNMP management link.
C-28
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-8. Alarm Configuration Options (2 of 4)
DialOut: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Alarm and Trap Dial Out. Controls whether generated alarm or trap messages initiate a
call if the integral modem connection or carrier external communication port device
connection has not already been established. When enabled, a call is placed to the phone
number contained in the alarm directory (directory A). If the call cannot be completed and
the retry option is enabled, the alarm or trap message is held until the call is completed or
has been retried unsuccessfully once. If more than one alarm message is received while
waiting for a call retry, only the highest priority alarm message received is held; all
previous messages are discarded. When the modem port is configured as the SNMP
management link, up to 10 SNMP trap messages can be queued at the interface.
Enab – Enables automatic call initiation (dial out) if an alarm or trap message needs to be
sent.
Disab – Disables automatic call initiation. Trap messages sent to the modem port or
carrier external communication port device are queued (held) if an integral modem
connection or carrier external communication port device connection has not been
previously established. Alarm messages are not queued.
NOTE: For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, this configuration option is only available if the
communication port is enabled for an external device.
Call Retry: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Call Retry on Alarm or Trap. Determines whether a call that cannot be completed (busy,
no answer, etc.) is retried. This affects calls that are initiated in attempting to send an
alarm or trap message to the modem port or carrier external communication port device. If
call retry is specified, the DSU/CSU attempts to complete the call after a configurable
delay.
Enab – Enables call retry. If enabled, the call is retried once per alarm or trap message. A
delay as specified by the dial-out delay time is imposed between call attempts. If an
alternate dial-out directory is specified, both the alarm directory as well as the alternate
directory are retried once.
Disab – Disables call retry. If a call setup cannot be completed it is not retried.
NOTE: For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, this configuration option is only available if the
communication port is enabled for an external device.
Dial Delay: 5
Next
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 Prev
Dial Out Delay Time on Alarm or Trap. Specifies the number of minutes to wait between
successive dial-out alarms or traps and before a retry attempt after failed alarm dial-outs.
The factory default is 5 minutes.
NOTE: For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, this configuration option is only available if the
communication port is enabled for an external device.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-8. Alarm Configuration Options (3 of 4)
AltDialDir: None
Next None
1
2
3
4
5
Prev
Alternate Dial-Out Directory for Alarm or Trap. Specifies whether a call that cannot be
completed (busy, no answer, etc.) is retried using an alternate phone number. This affects
calls that are initiated in an attempt to send an alarm or trap message to the modem port
or carrier external communication port device. The alternate phone number to try is
contained in one of the five call directories. If call retry is enabled, the initial call is retried
at the original number once before a call attempt to the alternate number is tried. If the call
to the alternate number is unsuccessful, it is also retried once. The alternate dial-out
option applies to each alarm/trap event. Once a call for an alarm/trap message either
completes or fails all retry attempts, the next alarm/trap attempts to establish a call to the
phone number contained in the alarm directory.
None – Specifies that alternate alarm dial-out is not performed if a call cannot be
completed to the telephone number contained in the alarm directory.
1–5 – Specifies the call directory that contains the phone number to call if a call cannot be
completed to the telephone number contained in the alarm directory.
NOTE: For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, this configuration option is only available if the
communication port is enabled for an external device.
Err Rate: 10E-4
Next 10E-4 10E-5 10E-6 10E-7 10E-8 10E-9 Prev
Excessive Error Rate Threshold. Sets the error rate threshold that determines if an
Excessive Error Rate (EER) condition is declared. This rate is determined by the ratio of
the number of CRC6 errors to the total number of bits received over a set period of time.
Select from the following:
10E-4 – EER is declared if more than 1,535 CRC6 errors are detected within
10 seconds (factory default).
10E-5 – EER is declared if more than 921 CRC6 errors are detected within 60 seconds.
10E-6 – EER is declared if more than 92 CRC6 errors are detected within 60 seconds.
10E-7 – EER is declared if more than 9 CRC6 errors are detected within 60 seconds.
10E-8 – EER is declared if more than 41 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15-minute
intervals.
10E-9 – EER is declared if more than 4 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15-minute
intervals.
C-30
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-8. Alarm Configuration Options (4 of 4)
AlrmRelay: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Alarm Relay. Specifies whether an alarm condition for this circuit card activates the shared
alarm relay on the 3000 Series Carrier. The alarm deactivates if the condition(s) causing it
is corrected. An Alarm Cut-Off issued from the SDCP (or PC Emulation program) for a
particular carrier-mounted DSU/CSU also deactivates the alarm. The carrier-mounted
DSU/CSU does not reactivate the alarm relay until all alarm conditions for the unit are
cleared.
The following alarm conditions activate the alarm relay if this configuration option is
enabled:
Continuous Loss of Signal (LOS) or Out of Frame (OOF) at the network or DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Continuous Out of Frame (OOF) at any synchronous data port that has the Embedded
Data Link enabled.
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) received at either the network or DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface.
Yellow alarm signal received at either the network or DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface.
Excessive Error Rate (EER) detected at the network interface.
An Excessive Error Rate (EER) detected at any synchronous data port that has the
Embedded Data Link enabled.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ❚
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Management Configuration Options
The Management configuration options are divided into two tables as follows:
NOTE:
A circular symbol (❚) identifies configuration options that are available on
standalone DSU/CSUs only. A triangular symbol (❚) identifies configuration
options that are available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only.
Table C-9. General Management Configuration Options (1 of 7)
SNMP Mgt: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
SNMP Management Enable. Specifies whether the DSU/CSU responds to SNMP session
requests.
Enab – The DSU/CSU responds to SNMP session requests.
Disab – The DSU/CSU does not respond to SNMP session requests.
NMS Valid: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
NMS IP Validation. Specifies whether the DSU/CSU validates (for security reasons) the IP
address of an SNMP manager attempting to access the DSU/CSU. Allowable addresses
are specified using the NMS n IP Adr configuration option.
Enab – The DSU/CSU validates the IP address of SNMP management systems
attempting to access the DSU/CSU.
Disab – The DSU/CSU does not validate the IP address of SNMP management systems.
Num Sec Mgrs: 1
Next
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 Prev
Number of Security Managers. Specifies the number of SNMP managers that are allowed
to access the DSU/CSU.
NOTE: You must configure an IP address for each SNMP manager that is allowed access
to the DSU/CSU. Allowable addresses are specified using the NMS n IP Adr configuration
option.
NMS n IP Adr:
Next Edit Clear Prev
NMS Manager n IP Address. Specifies the allowable IP address of an SNMP manager
attempting to access the DSU/CSU. The manager number (n) is specified by the Num Sec
Mgrs configuration option.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the allowable IP address for the SNMP manager.
Clear – Allows you to clear the allowable IP address for the SNMP manager. The IP
address is set to 000.000.000.000.
C-32
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-9. General Management Configuration Options (2 of 7)
NMS n Access: Read
Next Read R/W Prev
NMS Manager n Access Type. Specifies the allowable type of access for an SNMP
manager attempting to access the DSU/CSU’s MIB using community name 1. The
manager number (n) is specified by the Num Sec Mgrs configuration option.
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get) to the accessible objects in the MIB for this
device when community name 1 is used. This includes all objects specified as either
read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.
R/W – Allows read and write access (SNMP Get and Set) to the objects in the MIB for this
device when community name 1 is used. Write access is allowed for all objects specified
as read/write in the MIB RFCs. Read access is allowed for all objects specified as either
read-only or read/write.
System Name:
Next Edit Clear Prev
System Name. Specifies the system name for this unit. This is the name of this
SNMP-managed node.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the system name.
Clear – Allows you to clear the system name.
System Location:
Next Edit Clear Prev
System Location. Specifies the system location for this unit. This is the physical location of
this SNMP-managed node.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the system location.
Clear – Allows you to clear the system location.
System Contact:
Next Edit Clear Prev
System Contact. Specifies the system contact person for this unit, and how to contact this
person.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the system contact.
Clear – Allows you to clear the system contact.
CommunityName1:
Next Edit Clear Prev
Community Name 1. Specifies the first of two community names that are allowed to
access this unit’s Management Information Base (MIB). External SNMP managers must
supply this name to access an object in the MIB.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the first community name.
Clear – Allows you to clear the first community name.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-9. General Management Configuration Options (3 of 7)
Access 1: Read
Next Read R/W Prev
Access 1. Specifies the type of access allowed for Community Name 1. This is the type of
access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing objects in the MIB using
Community Name 1.
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get) to the accessible objects in the MIB for this
device when community name 1 is used. This includes all objects specified as either
read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.
R/W – Allows read and write access (SNMP Get and Set) to the objects in the MIB for this
device when community name 1 is used. Write access is allowed for all objects specified
as read/write in the MIB RFCs. Read access is allowed for all objects specified as either
read-only or read/write.
CommunityName2:
Next Edit Clear Prev
Community Name 2. Specifies the second of two community names that are allowed to
access this unit’s Management Information Base (MIB). External SNMP managers must
supply this name to access an object in the MIB.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the second community name.
Clear – Allows you to clear the second community name.
Access 2: Read
Next Read R/W Prev
Access 2. Specifies the type of access allowed for Community Name 2. This is the type of
access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing objects in the MIB using
Community Name 2.
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get) to the accessible objects in the MIB for this
device when community name 2 is used. This includes all objects specified as either
read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.
R/W – Allows read and write access (SNMP Get and Set) to the objects in the MIB for this
device when community name 2 is used. Write access is allowed for all objects specified
as read/write in the MIB RFCs. Read access is allowed for all objects specified as either
read-only or read/write.
IP Adr:
Next Edit Clear Prev
IP Address for the DSU/CSU. Specifies the IP address needed to access the DSU/CSU.
Since this IP Address is not bound to a particular port, it can be used for remote access
via the FDL or EDL (for 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs) management link.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the IP address for the DSU/CSU.
Clear – Allows you to clear the IP address for the DSU/CSU. The IP address is set to
000.000.000.000.
C-34
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-9. General Management Configuration Options (4 of 7)
NetMask:
Next Edit Clear Prev
Subnet Mask for the DSU/CSU. Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the
DSU/CSU. Since this subnet mask is not bound to a particular port, it can be used for
remote access via the FDL or EDL (for 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs) management link.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the subnet mask for the DSU/CSU.
Clear – Allows you to clear the subnet mask for the DSU/CSU. The subnet mask is set to
000.000.000.000. If the subnet mask is 000.000.000.000, the IP protocol creates a default
subnet mask based on the class of the IP address (Class A: 255.000.000.000,
Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000).
Com IP Adr:
Next Edit Clear Prev
Com Port IP Address. Specifies the IP address for the communication port if the Com Use
configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the IP address for the communication port.
Clear – Allows you to clear the IP address for the communication port. The IP address is
set to 000.000.000.000.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs if the
communication port is disabled.
Com NetMask:
Next Edit Clear Prev
Subnet Mask for the Communication Port. Specifies the subnet mask for the
communication port if the Com Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the subnet mask for the communication port.
Clear – Allows you to clear the subnet mask for the communication port. The subnet mask
is set to 000.000.000.000. If the subnet mask is 000.000.000.000, the IP protocol creates
a default subnet mask based on the class of the IP address (Class A: 255.000.000.000,
Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000).
NOTE: This configuration option is not available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs if the
communication port is disabled.
Com Link: PPP
Next PPP SLIP Prev
Com Port Link Layer Protocol. Specifies the link layer protocol for the communication port
if the Com Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy.
PPP – Specifies PPP as the link layer protocol for the IP management link on the
communication port.
SLIP – Specifies SLIP as the link layer protocol for the IP management link on the
communication port. The communication port must be configured for asynchronous
operation to support SLIP. This selection does not appear if the Com Use configuration
option is set to Daisy.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs if the
communication port is disabled.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-9. General Management Configuration Options (5 of 7)
Modem IP Adr:
Next Edit Clear Prev
Modem Port IP Address. Specifies the IP address for the modem port if the Modem Use
configuration option is set to Mgmt.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the IP address for the modem port.
Clear – Allows you to clear the IP address for the modem port. The IP address is set to
000.000.000.000.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
Mdm NetMask:
Next Edit Clear Prev
Subnet Mask for the Modem Port. Specifies the Subnet Mask for the modem port if the
Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the Subnet Mask for the modem port.
Clear – Allows you to clear the Subnet Mask for the modem port. The Subnet Mask is set
to 000.000.000.000. If the Subnet Mask is 000.000.000.000, the IP protocol creates a
default Subnet Mask based on the class of the IP address (Class A: 255.000.000.000,
Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000).
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
Alt Mdm IP Adr:
Next Edit Clear Prev
Alternate Modem Port IP Address. Specifies the alternate IP address for the modem port
if the Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt. This IP address is needed if a call
attempt does not complete on the primary alarm/trap phone number (contained in the
alarm directory) and the alternate dial out directory is used to try another phone number.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the alternate IP address for the modem port.
Clear – Allows you to clear the alternate IP address for the modem port. The IP address is
set to 000.000.000.000.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
Alt Mdm NetMask:
Next Edit Clear Prev
Alternate Subnet Mask for the Modem Port. Specifies the alternate Subnet Mask for the
modem port if the Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt. This Subnet Mask is
needed if a call attempt does not complete on the primary alarm/trap phone number
(contained in the alarm directory) and the alternate dial-out directory is used to try another
phone number. If this configuration option contains a non-zero Subnet Mask, it is used as
the Subnet Mask for the modem port if a call is completed to the alternate phone number.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the alternate Subnet Mask for the modem port.
Clear – Allows you to clear the alternate Subnet Mask for the modem port. The Subnet
Mask is set to 000.000.000.000. If the Subnet Mask is 000.000.000.000, the IP protocol
creates a default Subnet Mask based on the class of the IP address
(Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000).
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
C-36
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-9. General Management Configuration Options (6 of 7)
Modem Link: PPP
Next PPP SLIP Prev
Modem Port Link Layer Protocol. Specifies the link layer protocol for the modem port if the
Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt.
PPP – Specifies PPP as the link layer protocol for the IP management link on the modem
port.
SLIP – Specifies SLIP protocol as the link layer protocol for the IP management link on the
modem port. The modem port must be configured for asynchronous operation to support
SLIP.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
Aux IP Adr:
Next Edit Clear Prev
IP Address for the Auxiliary Port. Specifies the IP address for the auxiliary port if the Aux
Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy. The auxiliary port only supports the PPP
link protocol.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the IP address for the auxiliary port.
Clear – Allows you to clear the IP address for the auxiliary port. The IP address is set to
000.000.000.000.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
Aux NetMask:
Next Edit Clear Prev
Subnet Mask for the Auxiliary Port. Specifies the subnet mask for the auxiliary port if the
Aux Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy.
Edit – Allows you to edit and/or display the subnet mask for the auxiliary port.
Clear – Allows you to clear the subnet mask for the auxiliary port. The subnet mask is set
to 000.000.000.000. If the subnet mask is 000.000.000.000, the IP protocol creates a
default subnet mask based on the class of the IP address (Class A: 255.000.000.000,
Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C: 255.255.255.000).
NOTE: This configuration option is available on standalone DSU/CSUs only. ❚
IPBusMast: Disab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Setting the IP Bus Master. Specifies whether or not a particular carrier-mounted unit is the
IP Bus Master. There can only be one IP Bus Master per 3000 Series Carrier. Typically,
the carrier-mounted unit that has the SNMP/Telnet management system connected to it is
the IP Bus Master. This allows for faster access to the remaining carrier units. If an
SNMP/Telnet management system is connected to another carrier-mounted unit (i.e. not
the IP Bus Master) and the SNMP/Telnet management system tries to access another
carrier-mounted unit, the data has to be routed to the IP Bus Master first. Once the IP Bus
Master receives the data, it is routed to the appropriate slot.
Enab – This unit is the IP Bus Master. Only one IP Bus Master is allowed per 3000 Series
Carrier.
Disab – This unit is not the IP Bus Master.
NOTE: This configuration option is available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only. ❚
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-9. General Management Configuration Options (7 of 7)
Def Netwk: None
Next None IPBus Com Modem Aux FDL EDL1 EDL2 EDL3
EDL4 Prev
Default Network Destination. Specifies the default network destination. This configuration
option specifies where the default network is connected. For example, if the default
network is connected to the communication port, you select Com. If the default network is
connected to the far-end 31xx Series device over the FDL, you select FDL. The routing
protocol uses the default network destination to route data that does not have a specific
route.
None – No default network destination. Data that cannot be routed is discarded.
IPBus – The default network destination is the IP Bus on the carrier backplane. This
selection only appears for carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs which are not configured as the IP
Bus Master.
Com – The default network destination is the communication port. This selection only
appears if the Com Use configuration option is set to Mgmt.
Modem – The default network destination is the modem port. This selection only appears
if the Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt. This selection does not appear on
carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs.
Aux – The default network destination is the auxiliary port. This selection only appears if
the Aux Use configuration option is set to Mgmt.
FDL – The default network destination is FDL. This selection only appears if the FDL
management link is enabled.
EDLn – For 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs, the default network destination is the EDLn port
(where n is 1–4). This selection only appears in 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs if the
synchronous data port’s EDL management link is enabled.
NOTE: If the chosen default network link is disabled or down, data is discarded. Return
to this menu and choose another default network.
C-38
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-10. Management Trap Configuration Options (1 of 3)
Num Trap Mgrs: 1
Next
1
2
3
4
5
6
Prev
Number of Trap Managers. Specifies the number of SNMP trap managers that are to
receive traps for this unit.
NOTE: You must configure an IP address for each trap manager that is to receive trap
messages.
Trapn IP Adr:
Next Edit Clear Prev
Trap n IP Address. Specifies the IP address for each trap manager. This configuration
option is repeated for all trap managers supported by the unit.
Edit – Allows you to edit or display the IP address for Trap Manager n.
Clear – Allows you to clear the IP address for Trap Manager n. The IP address is set to
000.000.000.000.
Trapn Dst: None
Next None IPBus Com Modem Aux FDL EDL1 EDL2 EDL3
EDL4 Prev
Trap Manager n Destination. Specifies the network destination for Trap Manager n. This
configuration option is displayed for the number of trap managers (n) specified by the
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.
None – No Trap Manager n network destination. Traps are discarded.
IPBus – The Trap Manager n network destination is the IP Bus on the carrier backplane.
This selection only appears for carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs which are not configured as
the IP Bus Master.
Com – The Trap Manager n network destination is the communication port. This selection
only appears if the Com Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy.
Modem – The Trap Manager n network destination is the modem port. This selection only
appears if the Modem Use configuration option is set to Mgmt. This selection does not
appear on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs.
Aux – The Trap Manager n network destination is the auxiliary port. This selection only
appears if the Aux Use configuration option is set to Mgmt or Daisy.
FDL – The Trap Manager n network destination is the FDL management link. This
selection only appears if the FDL management link is enabled.
EDLn – The Trap Manager n network destination is the EDLn port (where n is 1–4). This
selection only appears if the synchronous data port’s EDL management link is enabled.
NOTE: If the chosen destination link is disabled or down, the traps are discarded.
Return to this menu and choose another destination.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-10. Management Trap Configuration Options (2 of 3)
Gen Trap: Both
Next Disab Warm Auth Both Prev
General Trap Types. Specifies the general trap types to enable.
Disab – Disables the sending of trap messages for warmStart and authenticationFailure
events.
Warm – Sends trap messages for warmStart events to the currently configured trap
manager(s).
Auth – Sends trap messages for authenticationFailure events to the currently configured
trap manager(s).
Both – Sends trap messages for warmStart and authenticationFailure events to the
currently configured trap manager(s).
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the SNMP Trap configuration option
Entp Trap: Enab
Next Enab Disab Prev
Enterprise Specific Traps. Specifies whether enterpriseSpecific traps are enabled.
Enab – Sends trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events to the currently configured
trap manager(s).
Disab – Disables the sending of trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the SNMP Trap configuration option
Link Trap: Both
Next Disab Up Down Both Prev
Link Trap Type. Specifies the link trap type to enable. Interfaces monitored for linkUp and
linkDown traps are specified with the Trap I/F configuration option.
Disab – Disables the sending of trap messages for linkDown or linkUp events.
Up – Sends trap messages for linkUp events to the currently configured trap manager(s).
Down – Sends trap messages for linkDown events to the currently configured trap
manager(s).
Both – Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events to the currently configured
trap manager(s).
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the SNMP Trap configuration option
C-40
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Table C-10. Management Trap Configuration Options (3 of 3)
Trap I/F: All
Next NET DTE T1s Ports All Prev
Link Trap Interfaces. Specifies which interfaces generate linkUp and linkDown trap
messages. These traps are supported on the T1 interfaces (network and DTE
Drop/Insert) and the synchronous data ports.
NET – Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events occurring on the network
interface.
DTE – Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events occurring on the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. This selection does not appear if the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface is disabled.
T1s – Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events occurring on the network or
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Ports – Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events occurring on the
synchronous data ports.
All – Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events occurring on the network
interface, DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, or the synchronous data ports.
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if the Link Trap configuration option is
not configured to generate trap messages for linkUp or linkDown events.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Configuration Worksheets
This section contains one set of blank worksheets to be used when configuring
your DSU/CSU in the network. In the tables, default settings for Factory 1 are
indicated by bold type. It is recommended that you copy these blank worksheets
before using them.
DTE Options
DTE Port
Value (Default in Bold)
Enab, Disab
DTE Framing
DTE Coding
Equal
D4, ESF
AMI, B8ZS
0–133, 133–266, 266–399, 399–533, 533–655
Extrn DLB
Send Ones
Enab, Disab
Enab, Disab
Net Options
NET Framing
NET Coding
LBO
Value (Default in Bold)
D4, ESF
AMI, B8ZS
0.0, –7.5, –15, –22.5
Enab, Disab
ANSI PRM
Mgmt Link
NET LLB
Enab, Disab
Enab, Disab
NET PLB
BitStuff
Enab, Disab
62411, Part68, Disab
Edit, Clear
Circuit Ident
General Options
Gen Yellow
Clock Src
Value (Default in Bold)
Enab, Disab
NET, DTE, Prt1, Int, Ext
2048, 1544, 8
Clock Rate
Tst Timeout
Tst Duration
Enab, Disab
1–120 (Default = 10)
C-42
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
User Options
Self-Test
Value (Default in Bold)
Enab, Disab
FP Access
FP Pass
❚
❚
Enab, Disab
Enab, Disab
Dial-In
Enab, Disab
Password
None, Com, Modem, Both
Enab, Disab
Com Port
❚
Com Use
Mgmt, ASCII, Daisy, Term
Disab, AT, Other
Edit, Clear
ComExtDev
ComConnPrefix
ComConnected
❚
❚
❚
Edit, Clear
ComEscapeSeq ❚
Edit, Clear
ComEscDel
ComDisconnect
Com Type
❚
❚
❚
❚
None, 0.2s, 0.4s, 0.6s, 0.8s, 1.0s
Edit, Clear
Async, Sync
Int, Ext
Com Clk
Com Rate
1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 38.4
7, 8
Char Length
CParity
None, Even, Odd
1, 1.5, 2
CStop Bits
Ignore DTR
CmInActTm
CmDiscTm
Modem Use
Modem Type
Modem Rate
MChar Len
MParity
Yes, No
Enab, Disab
1–60 (Default = 5)
Mgmt, ASCII, Term
Async, Sync
1.2, 2.4
❚
❚
❚
❚
❚
❚
❚
7, 8
None, Even, Odd
1, 2
MStop Bits
LSpaceDisc
Enab, Disab
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
User Options
MoInActTm
MoDiscTm
Aux Use
Value (Default in Bold)
Enab, Disab
❚
❚
❚
❚
1–60 (Default = 5)
None, Mgmt, Daisy
9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 38.4
Enab, Disab
Aux Rate
TnSession
TnPaswd
Enab, Disab
TnInActTm
TnDiscTm
Enab, Disab
1–60 (Default = 5)
Alarm Options
Alrm Msg
SNMP Trap
Trap Disc
Value (Default in Bold)
Disab, Modem, Com, Both
Enab, Disab
Enab, Disab
DialOut
Enab, Disab
Call Retry
Dial Delay
AltDialDir
Enab, Disab
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
None, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, 10E-8, 10E-9
Enab, Disab
Err Rate
Alrm Relay
❚
NOTE:
A circular symbol (❚) identifies configuration options that are available on
standalone DSU/CSUs only. A triangular symbol (❚) identifies configuration
options that are available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only.
C-44
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Prt1 Options
Port Type
Base Rate
Net DCLB
Port LB
Value (Default in Bold)
E530, V.35, RS449, X.21
Nx64, Nx56
Disab, V.54, FT1, Both
Disab, DTLB, DCLB, Both
Disab, DTR, RTS, Both
None, Halt
All Ones
Rcv Yellow
Tx Clock
InvertTxC
InvrtData
EDL
Int, Ext
Enab, Disab
Enab, Disab
Enab, Disab
Err Rate
10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, 10E-8, 10E-9
Disab, Maint, Send, Both
Disab, Maint
Near-end
Far-end
Mgmt Link
Enab, Disab
Prt2 Options
Port Type
Base Rate
Net DCLB
Port LB
Value (Default in Bold)
E530, V.35, RS449, X.21
Nx64, Nx56
Disab, V.54, FT1, Both
Disab, DTLB, DCLB, Both
Disab, DTR, RTS, Both
None, Halt
All Ones
Rcv Yellow
Tx Clock
InvertTxC
InvrtData
EDL
Int, Ext
Enab, Disab
Enab, Disab
Enab, Disab
Err Rate
10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, 10E-8, 10E-9
Disab, Maint, Send, Both
Disab, Maint
Near-end
Far-end
Mgmt Link
Enab, Disab
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Prt3 Options
Port Type
Base Rate
Net DCLB
Port LB
Value (Default in Bold)
E530, V.35, RS449, X.21
Nx64, Nx56
Disab, V.54, FT1, Both
Disab, DTLB, DCLB, Both
Disab, DTR, RTS, Both
None, Halt
All Ones
Rcv Yellow
Tx Clock
InvertTxC
InvrtData
EDL
Int, Ext
Enab, Disab
Enab, Disab
Enab, Disab
Err Rate
10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, 10E-8, 10E-9
Disab, Maint, Send, Both
Disab, Maint
Near-end
Far-end
Mgmt Link
Enab, Disab
Prt4 Options
Port Type
Base Rate
Net DCLB
Port LB
Value (Default in Bold)
E530, V.35, RS449, X.21
Nx64, Nx56
Disab, V.54, FT1, Both
Disab, DTLB, DCLB, Both
Disab, DTR, RTS, Both
None, Halt
All Ones
Rcv Yellow
Tx Clock
InvertTxC
InvrtData
EDL
Int, Ext
Enab, Disab
Enab, Disab
Enab, Disab
Err Rate
10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, 10E-8, 10E-9
Disab, Maint, Send, Both
Disab, Maint
Near-end
Far-end
Mgmt Link
Enab, Disab
C-46
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Network Interface
Network Channel
Allocation
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9
N10
N11
N12
N13
N14
N15
N16
N17
N18
N19
N20
N21
N22
N23
N24
Allocations:
N1 – N24 indicates allocation to DTE (Drop/Insert) channels.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Interface
DTE (DSX-1) Channel
Allocation
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
Allocations:
D1 – D24 indicates allocation to network channels.
C-48
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
DTE Chan Config
Assign: (N1 – 24)
Voice (RBS or Data)
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Port Chan
Conf
Options
Value (Default in Bold)
NET, DTE, Prt2, Prt3, Prt4
Block, ACAMI, Chan
Assign To
Assign By
Port Rate
Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704,
768, 832, 896, 960, 1024, 1088, 1152, 1216, 1280, 1344, 1408,
1472, 1536
Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616,
672, 728, 784, 840, 896, 952, 1008, 1064, 1120, 1176, 1232,
1288, 1344
If Assign By Block
Start At
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select One)
Port 1
Port Rate
Start At
Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768
Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616, 672
If Assign By ACAMI
If Assign By Chan
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23
(Select One)
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select Multiple)
Assign To
Assign By
NET, DTE, Prt1, Prt3, Prt4
Block, ACAMI, Chan
Port Rate
Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704,
768, 832, 896, 960, 1024, 1088, 1152, 1216, 1280, 1344, 1408,
1472, 1536
Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616,
672, 728, 784, 840, 896, 952, 1008, 1064, 1120, 1176, 1232,
1288, 1344
If Assign By Block
Start At
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select One)
Port 2
Port Rate
Start At
Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768
Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616, 672
If Assign By ACAMI
If Assign By Chan
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23
(Select One)
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select Multiple)
C-50
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Port Chan
Conf
Options
Value (Default in Bold)
NET, DTE, Prt1, Prt2, Prt4
Block, ACAMI, Chan
Assign To
Assign By
Port Rate
Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704,
768, 832, 896, 960, 1024, 1088, 1152, 1216, 1280, 1344, 1408,
1472, 1536
Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616,
672, 728, 784, 840, 896, 952, 1008, 1064, 1120, 1176, 1232,
1288, 1344
If Assign By Block
Start At
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select One)
Port 3
Port Rate
Start At
Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768
Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616, 672
If Assign By ACAMI
If Assign By Chan
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23
(Select One)
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select Multiple)
Assign To
Assign By
NET, DTE, Prt1, Prt2, Prt3
Block, ACAMI, Chan
Port Rate
Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704,
768, 832, 896, 960, 1024, 1088, 1152, 1216, 1280, 1344, 1408,
1472, 1536
Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616,
672, 728, 784, 840, 896, 952, 1008, 1064, 1120, 1176, 1232,
1288, 1344
If Assign By Block
Start At
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select One)
Port 4
Port Rate
Start At
Nx64: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768
Nx56: 56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336, 392, 448, 504, 560, 616, 672
If Assign By ACAMI
If Assign By Chan
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23
(Select One)
Time Slot (Nx or Dx): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
(Select Multiple)
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
General Mgmt
Options
Value (Default in Bold)
Enab, Disab
Enab, Disab
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Edit, Clear
SNMP Mgt
NMS Valid
Num Sec Mgrs
NMS n IP Adr
NMS n Access
System Name
System Location
System Contact
CommunityName1
Access 1
Read, R/w
Edit, Clear
Edit, Clear
Edit, Clear
Edit, Clear
Read, R/W
CommunityName2
Access 2
Edit, Clear
Read, R/W
IP Adr
Edit, Clear
NetMask
Edit, Clear
Com IP Adr
Com NetMask
Com Link
Edit, Clear
Edit, Clear
PPP, SLIP
Modem IP Adr
Mdm NetMask
Alt Mdm IP Adr
❚
Edit, Clear
❚
❚
Edit, Clear
Edit, Clear
Alt Mdm NetMask❚
Edit, Clear
Modem Link
Aux IP Adr
Aux NetMask
IPBusMast
Def Netwk
❚
❚
❚
❚
PPP, SLIP
Edit, Clear
Edit, Clear
Enab, Disab
None, IPBus, Com, Modem, Aux, FDL, EDLn
C-52
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
Mgmt Trap Options Value (Default in Bold)
Num Trap Mgrs
Trapn IP Adr
Trapn Dst
Gen Trap
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Edit, Clear
None, IPBus, Com, Modem, Aux, FDL, EDLn
Disab, Warm, Auth, Both
Enab, Disab
Entp Trap
Link Trap
Disab, Up, Down, Both
Trap I/F
NET, DTE, T1s, Ports, All
NOTE:
A circular symbol (❚) identifies configuration options that are available on
standalone DSU/CSUs only. A triangular symbol (❚) identifies configuration
options that are available on carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs only.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
C-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C. Configuration Options
C-54
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pin Assignments
D
Overview
The DSU/CSU is shipped with a power module and a VF cable. Various other
interconnecting cables are available. For cable feature numbers, refer to
and cables.
T1 Network Interface
The T1 network interface connector is an RJ48C, 8-position, unkeyed modular jack
The T1 line interface cable is a 20-foot, 24 AWG solid, 2-twisted pair cable that is
Table D-1. T1 Network Interface Connector
Signal
Pin Number
Receive Ring
Receive Tip
Transmit Ring
Transmit Tip
1
2
4
5
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Pin Assignments
RJ48C
PLUG
UNKEYED
RJ48C
PLUG
UNKEYED
BLUE
BLUE
TWISTED PAIR
TWISTED PAIR
RECEIVE RING
RECEIVE TIP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
WHITE
WHITE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ORANGE
WHITE
ORANGE
WHITE
TRANSMIT RING
TRANSMIT TIP
493-14156-01
Figure D-1. T1 Line Interface Cable, RJ48C-to-RJ48C
RJ48C
DA15P
PLUG
PLUG
UNKEYED
BLUE
BLUE
RECEIVE RING
RECEIVE TIP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
11 RECEIVE RING
3
RECEIVE TIP
WHITE/BLUE
ORANGE
WHITE/BLUE
ORANGE
TRANSMIT RING
TRANSMIT TIP
9
1
TRANSMIT RING
TRANSMIT TIP
WHITE/ORANGE
WHITE/ORANGE
493-14342
Figure D-2. T1 Line Interface Cable, RJ48C-to-DA15P
D-2
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Pin Assignments
DTE Drop/Insert Interface
The DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface connector is a DB15-type socket
using Relay Contact Sense for external DTE loopback, refer to the Extrn DLB
is typically supplied by a DTE vendor. It is made of shielded twisted-pair wires
(22 AWG). The cable connector is a DB15-type plug connector. Be sure to connect
the shield ground only at the DSU/CSU end to prevent ground loops.
Table D-2. DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Connector
Signal
Pin Number
Receiver Tip from DTE
Receiver Ring from DTE
Transmitter Tip to DTE
Transmitter Ring to DTE
Relay Contact Sense Return
Relay Contact Sense
Shield Ground
1
9
3
11
12
14
2, 4
DB15
PLUG
TWISTED PAIR
TWISTED PAIR
1
9
2
3
RECEIVE TIP
RECEIVE RING
SHIELD GROUND
TRANSMIT TIP
TO
DTE
11 TRANSMIT RING
SHIELD GROUND
4
12 RETURN
14 SENSE
EXTERNAL
RELAY
CONTACT
494-14152-02
Figure D-3. DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) Cable
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
D-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Pin Assignments
MODEM Port Interface
The integral modem port connector is a 4-position, RJ11C-like modular jack
The integral modem VF cable is a 14.5-foot, 26 AWG, 4-conductor keyed cable
is supplied with your standalone DSU/CSU.
Table D-3. Modem Port Interface
Signal
VF Ring
VF Tip
Pin Number
2
3
RJ11
PLUG
RJ11
PLUG
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RING
TIP
493-14157-01
Figure D-4. Integral Modem Cable
D-4
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Pin Assignments
AUX Port Interface
The Auxiliary (AUX) port connects to the LAN Adapter for SNMP or Telnet
applications, or to another DSU/CSU’s COM port for daisy chain connectivity. (The
SNMP LAN Adapter includes the cable that is needed to attach it to the
DSU/CSU.) The AUX port connector is an 8-position unkeyed modular connector
DSU/CSUs) and a DB25-type socket connector for Model 3164 and 3165
DSU/CSUs).
NOTE:
For daisy-chaining an AUX port to a COM port, an 8-pin-to-8-pin cable
(Model 3160) or 25-pin-to-8-pin cable (Model 3164 or 3165) is required. The
configuration options Com Use and Aux Use must be set to Daisy. Whenever
the cable is connected or disconnected, change the Com Use and Aux Use
configuration options to the correct values.
Table D-4. AUX Port Connector for Model 3160 DSU/CSUs
Signal
Direction
Pin Number
DTE Transmit Clock
DTE Receive Data
Signal Ground
From DSU/CSU
To DSU/CSU
—
1
2
3
4
8
DTE Transmit Data
DTE Receive Clock
From DSU/CSU
From DSU/CSU
Table D-5. AUX Port Connector for Model 3164 and 3165 DSU/CSUs
Signal
Direction
Pin Number
DTE Transmit Clock
DTE Receive Data
Signal Ground
From DSU/CSU
To DSU/CSU
—
15
3
7
DTE Transmit Data
DTE Receive Clock
From DSU/CSU
From DSU/CSU
2
17
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
D-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Pin Assignments
COM Port Interface
The COM port connects to a PC for front panel emulation, to an ASCII terminal or
printer for alarms, to an async terminal, to a network device (e.g., a router) for
SNMP or Telnet applications, to the LAN Adapter for SNMP or Telnet applications,
or to another DSU/CSU’s AUX port for daisy chain connectivity. (The SNMP LAN
Adapter includes the cable that is needed to attach it to the DSU/CSU.) The
Port Connector). The data signals on this port are referenced to a DTE interface.
the COM port-to-terminal/printer cable is shown in Figure D-6, COM
NOTE:
For daisy-chaining an AUX port to a COM port, a 25-pin-to-8-pin cable is
required and the appropriate configuration options (Com Use and Aux Use)
must be set to Daisy. Whenever the cable is connected or disconnected, you
should change the Daisy selection to ensure that the correct parameters have
been negotiated for the link layer.
Table D-6. COM Port Connector
Signal
Direction
Pin Number
DCE Transmit Clock
DCE Receive Data
Signal Ground
From DSU/CSU
From DSU/CSU
—
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DCE Transmit Data
DCE Data Terminal Ready
DCE Carrier Detect
DCE Request-to-Send
DCE Receive Clock
To DSU/CSU
To DSU/CSU
From DSU/CSU
To DSU/CSU
From DSU/CSU
D-6
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Pin Assignments
8-POSITION
MODULAR
PLUG KEYED
DB9
SOCKET
1
NO CONNECTION
RX DATA
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
5
3
4
1
8
6
7
RX DATA
GROUND
TX DATA
DTR
GROUND
TX DATA
DTR
CD
CD
RTS
CTS
NO CONNECTION
DSR
RTS
494-14153-02
Figure D-5. COM Port-to-PC Cable
8-POSITION
DB25
PLUG
MODULAR
PLUG KEYED
1
15
3
RX DATA
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RX DATA
GROUND
TX DATA
DTR
GROUND
TX DATA
DTR
7
2
20
8
CD
CD
RTS
5
CTS
6
DSR
4
RTS
17
494-14154-02
Figure D-6. COM Port-to-Terminal/Printer Cable
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
D-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Pin Assignments
EIA-530-A Port Interface Connector
Table D-7. EIA-530-A Port Interface Connector
Circuit
Signal
Mnemonic ITU-T Number Direction
Pin
1
Shield
—
—
—
Signal Common
Signal Common
AB
AC
102A
102B
103
—
7
—
23
Transmitted Data BA
To DSU/CSU
2 (A)
14 (B)
Received Data
BB
104
105
106
109
From DSU/CSU 3 (A)
16 (B)
Request-to-Send CA
To DSU/CSU
4 (A)
19 (B)
Clear-to-Send
CB
CF
From DSU/CSU 5 (A)
13 (B)
Received Line
Signal Detector
From DSU/CSU 8 (A)
10 (B)
DCE Ready
DTE Ready
CC
CD
DA
107
From DSU/CSU
To DSU/CSU
To DSU/CSU
6
108/1, /2
113
20
Transmit Signal
Element Timing
(DTE Source)
11 (B)
24 (A)
Transmit Signal
Element Timing
(DCE Source)
DB
DD
LL
114
115
From DSU/CSU 12 (B)
15 (A)
Receiver Signal
Element Timing
(DCE Source)
From DSU/CSU 17 (A)
9 (B)
Local Loopback
141
140
142
To DSU/CSU
To DSU/CSU
18
21
Remote Loopback RL
Test Mode TM
From DSU/CSU 25
D-8
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Pin Assignments
EIA-530-A-to-RS-449 Cable Interface
530
SIGNAL
DB37 449
SOCKET SIGNAL
DB25
PLUG
SHIELD
TD-A
1
1
SHIELD
TD-A
2
4
TD-B
14
3
22
6
TD-B
RD-A
RD-A
RD-B
16
15
12
17
9
24
5
RD-B
TXC-A
TXC-B
RXC-A
RXC-B
RTS-A
RTS-B
CTS-A
CTS-B
DTR
TXC-A
TXC-B
RXC-A
RXC-B
RTS-A
RTS-B
CTS-A
CTS-B
DTR-A
RR-A
23
8
26
7
4
19
5
25
9
13
20
8
27
12
13
31
11
19
14
10
20
17
35
18
RLSD-A
RLSD-B
DSR
10
6
RR-B
DM-A
SIG. COMMON
RL
7
SIG. COMMON
RL
21
18
23
24
11
25
22
LL
LL
RCV. COMMON
TT-A
RCV. COMMON
TT-A
TT-B
TT-B
TM
TM
SIG. COMMON
29
30
DM-B
DTR-B
495-14323-01
Figure D-7. EIA-530-A-to-RS-449 Adapter
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
D-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Pin Assignments
Table D-8. RS-449 Cable Interface
Circuit
ITU-T
Signal
Mnemonic
Number
Direction
Pin
1
Shield
—
—
—
Signal Ground
Receive Ground
Send Common
Send Data
SG
RC
SC
SD
102A
102B
—
—
19
20
37
—
—
103
To DSU/CSU
4 (A)
22 (B)
Receive Data
Request-to-Send
Clear-to-Send
Receiver Ready
Data Mode
RD
RS
CS
RR
DM
TR
TT
ST
RT
LL
104
From
DSU/CSU
6 (A)
24 (B)
105
To DSU/CSU
7 (A)
25 (B)
106
From
DSU/CSU
9 (A)
27 (B)
109
From
DSU/CSU
13 (A)
31 (B)
107
From
DSU/CSU
11 (A)
29 (B)
Terminal Ready
Terminal Timing
Send Timing
108/1, /2
113
To DSU/CSU
12 (A)
30 (B)
To DSU/CSU
17 (A)
35 (B)
114
From
DSU/CSU
5 (A)
23 (B)
Receive Timing
Local Loopback
115
From
DSU/CSU
8 (A)
26 (B)
141
140
142
To DSU/CSU
To DSU/CSU
10
14
18
Remote Loopback RL
Test Mode TM
From
DSU/CSU
D-10
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Pin Assignments
EIA-530-A-to-V.35 Cable Interface
530 DB25
SIGNAL PLUG
V.35
SIGNAL
MS34
SOCKET
SHIELD
TD-A
1
2
A
P
S
R
T
Y
SHIELD
TD-A
TD-B 14
RD-A
TD-B
3
RD-A
RD-B 16
TXC-A 15
TXC-B 12
RXC-A 17
RD-B
TXC-A
AA TXC-B
V
X
C
D
F
RXC-A
RXC-B
RTS
RXC-B
RTS
9
4
5
8
6
7
CTS
CTS
RLSD
RLSD
DSR
DSR
E
B
U
W
H
N
L
SIG. COMMON
SIG. COMMON
TT-A
TT-A 24
TT-B 11
TT-B
DTR 20
DTR
RL 21
RL
LL 18
LL
TM 25
NN TM
SIG. COMMON 23
497-15233
Figure D-8. EIA-530-A-to-V.35 Adapter
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
D-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Pin Assignments
Table D-9. V.35 Cable Interface
Signal
ITU-T Number
Direction
Pin
A
Shield
—
—
Signal Common
Transmitted Data
102
103
—
B
To DSU/CSU
P (A)
S (B)
Received Data
104
From DSU/CSU
R (A)
T (B)
Request to Send
Clear to Send
105
106
To DSU/CSU
C
D
F
From DSU/CSU
From DSU/CSU
Data Channel Received 109
Line Signal Detector
Data Set Ready
107
From DSU/CSU
To DSU/CSU
To DSU/CSU
E
H
Data Terminal Ready
108/1, /2
Transmit Signal Element 113
Timing (DTE Source)
U (A)
W (B)
Transmit Signal Element 114
Timing (DCE Source)
From DSU/CSU
From DSU/CSU
Y (A)
AA (B)
Receiver Signal
Element Timing (DCE
Source)
115
V (A)
X (B)
Local Loopback
141
To DSU/CSU
To DSU/CSU
From DSU/CSU
L
Loopback/Maintenance 140
N
Test Indicator
142
NN
D-12
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Pin Assignments
EIA-530-A-to-X.21 Cable Interface
530 DB25
SIGNAL PLUG
X.21
SIGNAL
DB15
SOCKET
TD-A
TD-B
2
14
3
2
9
TD-A
TD-B
RD-A
4
RD-A
RD-B
16
17
9
11
6
RD-B
RXC-A
RXC-A
RXC-B
RTS-A
RTS-B
RLSD-A
RLSD-B
SIG. COMMON
TT-A
RXC-B
13
3
RTS-A
4
RTS-B
19
8
10
5
RLSD-A
RLSD-B
SIG. COMMON
TT-A
10
7
12
8
24
11
7
TT-B
14
TT-B
495-14787
Figure D-9. EIA-530-A-to-X.21 Adapter
Table D-10. X.21 Cable Interface
Signal
ITU-T Number
Direction
Pin
Signal Common
Transmitted Data
102
103
—
8
To DSU/CSU 2 (A)
9 (B)
Received Data
104
105
109
113
115
From
DSU/CSU
4 (A)
11 (B)
Request-to-Send
To DSU/CSU 3 (A)
10 (B)
Data Channel Received
Line Signal Detector
From
DSU/CSU
5 (A)
12 (B)
Transmit Signal Element
Timing (DTE Source)
To DSU/CSU 7 (A)
14 (B)
Receiver Signal Element
Timing (DCE Source)
From
DSU/CSU
6 (A)
13 (B)
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
D-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Pin Assignments
Serial Crossover Cable
Use a serial crossover cable like the one shown in Figure D-10, Serial Crossover
modem to the DSU/CSU’s COM port.
Pin 14
Pin 1
P1
Plug
P2
Plug
Pin 14
Pin 1
Pin 25
Pin 13
Pin 25
Pin 13
P1
Pin
Pin
P2
Chassis Ground
TXD
1
Chassis Ground
TXD
1
2
2
RXD
3
RXD
3
RTS
4
RTS
4
CTS
5
CTS
5
DSR
6
DSR
6
Signal Ground
CD (RLSD)
7
Signal Ground
CD (RLSD)
7
8
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
DTR
DTR 20
21
22
23
24
25
497-15180a
Figure D-10. Serial Crossover Cable
D-14
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D. Pin Assignments
Power Input Connector
Pin 1 is at the lower right of the connector and Pin 6 at the upper left as you face
the back of the unit.
Table D-11. DC Power Connector
Signal
Pin Number
–48 Vdc Return
–48 Vdc A
1, 2
6
6
3
5
2
4
–48 Vdc B
5
+24 Vdc
5
1
+24 Vdc Return
Chassis Ground
4
99-16291
3
Optional DC Power Cable
stranded cable. The connector is terminated at one end with a 6-position
connector. The other end of the cable is terminated with a bare wire that should be
colors. The power source can be either a single source of +24 Vdc or up to two
sources of –48 Vdc (A and B). You cannot connect +24 Vdc and –48 Vdc to the
Figure D-11. DC Power Cable
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
D-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIB Objects
E
Overview
This appendix describes the Management Information Base (MIB) objects that are
supported by the DSU/CSU and provides a correlation between front panel
The DSU/CSU supports the following MIBs:
Defines the general objects for use in Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) internets and provides general information about the
DSU/CSU.
Defines objects for managing DS1 interfaces and supports the network and
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interfaces on the DSU/CSU.
Defines objects for managing RS-232-type interfaces and supports
synchronous data ports (PORTs 1– 4) and management communication ports
(AUX, MODEM, and COM ports) on the DSU/CSU.
An extension to MIB II that defines additional objects for control of generic
interfaces in MIB II. It supports control of tests on the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) and synchronous data interfaces that are not supported by other
MIBs.
Defines objects that are unique to devices such as Model 316x DSU/CSUs.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
E-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
MIB II (RFC 1213)
The objects defined by MIB II are organized into 10 different groups. The
DSU/CSU implements only those groups where the semantics of the group are
applicable to the implementation of a DSU/CSU. The MIB II object groups
supported or not supported by the 3100 Series devices are as follows:
System
Group
Supported.
Interface
Group
Supported for the network interface, the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface, the synchronous data ports, the COM port,
the AUX port, and the MODEM port. Interface statistics
(counters) apply to any port (COM, AUX, or MODEM),
whichever is defined as the SNMP management link.
Address
Translation
Group
Not supported since this group is not supported in MIB II.
IP Group
Supported.
Supported.
Supported.
Supported.
ICMP Group
TCP Group
UDP Group
EGP Group
Not supported since the EGP protocol is not supported by the
DSU/CSU.
Transmission Supported on the T1 interfaces using the DS1/E1 MIB.
Group
Supported on the synchronous data ports using the
RS-232-like MIB. Supported on the COM, AUX, and MODEM
ports using the RS-232-like MIB.
SNMP Group
Supported.
E-2
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
System Group, MIB II
The System Group objects are fully supported by the DSU/CSU. The following
sections provide clarification for objects contained in the System Group where it is
not otherwise clear how the object definition in MIB II is related to the DSU/CSU.
Objects not mentioned are supported as stated in the MIB.
System Group – “sysDescr” Object (system 1)
This object provides the full name and version identification for the system
hardware and software. This object displays the following string:
[Company Name] T1 DSU/CSU; model xxxx-xx-xxx; S/W Release: yy.yy.yy; H/W
CCA1: zzzz-zzz; H/W CCA2: zzzz-zzz; Serial number: ssssssss.
Where:
xxxx-xx-xxx represents the full model number of the unit.
yy.yy.yy represents the software revision number of the unit.
zzzz-zzz represents the hardware revision number of the unit.
ssssssss represents the serial number of the unit.
System Group – “sysObjectID” Object (system 2)
This object provides the authoritative identification of the network management
subsystem contained in the unit.
This object displays the following object identifier:
3160
3164
3165
3161
[Company OID].1.14.2.2.1
[Company OID].1.14.2.2.2
[Company OID].1.14.2.2.3
[Company OID].1.14.2.2.4
System group – “sysContact” Object (system 4)
This object provides a textual identification of the contact person for this managed
node.
System Group – “sysName” Object (system 5)
This object provides an administratively assigned name for this managed node.
System Group – “sysLocation” Object (system 6)
This object provides the physical location of this node.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
E-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
System Group – “sysServices” Object (system 7)
This object provides a value which indicates the set of services that are potentially
offered by the DSU/CSU. Only the following values are supported.
physical(1) – Layer 1 functionality for all interfaces.
datalink/subnetwork(2) – Layer 2 functionality (SLIP, PPP) for the COM, AUX,
and MODEM ports.
internet(4) – Layer 3 functionality (IP) for all management links.
end-to-end(8) – Layer 4 functionality (UDP) for all management links.
Therefore, set this object to 15 (the sum of 1 + 2 + 4 + 8).
Interface Group, MIB II
The Interfaces Group consists of an object indicating the number of interfaces
supported by the unit and an interface table containing an entry for each interface.
The DSU/CSU provides an entry in the interface table for the network interface, the
DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, each of the synchronous data ports (1, 2, or 4
depending on the model), the COM port, the AUX port, and the MODEM port, if
they apply. The following sections provide clarification for objects contained in the
Interface Group where it is not clear how the object definition in MIB II is related to
the DSU/CSU.
Interface Group – “ifNumber” Object (interfaces 1)
This variable contains the maximum number of MIB II supported interfaces
possible across the 31xx Series product line (9). This is different from the MIB
description, which is defined as the number of interfaces on the particular device.
This change allows the use of the same ifIndexes across all 31xx Series models.
Interface Group – “ifIndex” Object (ifEntry 1)
This object provides the index into the ifTable and typically into tables in other
MIBs also. The values of the ifIndex object do not vary between models even
though not all indexes are supported for a particular model. When an unsupported
index is accessed, “noSuchName” is returned.
The following are the values of the ifIndexes for all DSU/CSU models:
1 – Net T1
2 – DTE T1
3 – COM port
4 – Modem port
5 – Auxiliary RS-232 port
6 – DCE port 1
7 – DCE port 2
8 – DCE port 3
9 – DCE port 4
E-4
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
The supported ifIndexes for the 3160 DSU/CSU are:
Net T1
DTE T1
COM port
Modem port
Auxiliary RS-232 port
DCE port 1
DCE port 2
The supported ifIndexes for the 3161 carrier DSU/CSU are:
Net T1
DTE T1
COM port (if configured)
DCE port 1
DCE port 2 (if configured)
The supported ifIndexes for the 3164 DSU/CSU are:
Net T1
DTE T1
COM port
Modem port
Auxiliary RS-232 port
DCE port 1
DCE port 2
DCE port 3
DCE port 4
The supported ifIndexes for the 3165 DSU/CSU are:
Net T1
COM port
Modem port
DCE port 1
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
E-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Interface Group – “ifDescr” Object (ifEntry 2)
This object provides information about the interface. Each interface displays a text
string as shown below:
Network T1:
DTE T1:
COM:
“Network T1.[Company Name] T1 DSU/CSU, Hardware
Version:[CCA number for the CSU board]”.
“DTE T1.[Company Name] T1 DSU/CSU, Hardware
Version:[CCA number for the CSU board]”.
“COM port.[Company Name] T1 DSU/CSU, Hardware
Version:[CCA number for the CSU board for the standalone,
or the CCA number for the DSU board for the carrier]”.
Modem:
AUX:
“MODEM port.[Company Name] T1 DSU/CSU, Hardware
Version:[CCA number for the CSU board]”.
“AUX port.[Company Name] T1 DSU/CSU, Hardware
Version:[CCA number for the CSU board]”.
Data Ports:
“Data Port n.[Company Name] T1 DSU/CSU, Hardware
Version:[CCA number for the DSU board]”
(where n is 1 to 4).
Interface Group – “ifType” Object (ifEntry 3)
This object identifies the type of the interface based on the physical/link protocol(s)
immediately below the network layer. Only the following values are supported by
the DSU/CSU:
ds1 – Used for the network and DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interfaces.
propPointToPointSerial(22) – Used for the synchronous data ports. Used for
the MODEM or COM port when the port is not configured as the SNMP
management interface.
ppp(23) – Used for the MODEM, AUX, or COM port when the port is
configured for PPP.
slip(28) – Used for the MODEM or COM port when the port is configured for
SLIP.
Interface Group – “ifMtu” Object (ifEntry 4)
This object identifies the largest datagram that can be sent or received on the
interface. It is applicable only to the interface configured as the SNMP
management link. This object is zero for all other interfaces.
E-6
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Interface Group – “ifSpeed” Object (ifEntry 5)
This object provides the interface’s current bandwidth in bits per second. The
value of this object for each interface is specified as follows:
T1 Interfaces:
1,544,000 bps.
COM, AUX, and The currently configured data rate for the port.
MODEM:
Data Ports:
The currently configured data rate for the port when the port
is allocated to one of the T1 interfaces. If the port is not
allocated the data rate is defined as zero.
Interface Group – “ifAdminStatus” Object (ifEntry 7)
This object specifies the desired state (configuration) of the interface. This object
is supported only for the COM and MODEM ports. It provides the ability to switch
between using the port for SNMP or ASCII operations (dial-out, front panel
emulation). The value of this object will not affect the state of any of the interfaces
on the DSU/CSU other than the COM or MODEM port. Only the following values
are supported by the DSU/CSU:
up(1) – The SNMP management link is active on the COM or MODEM port.
testing(3) – The SNMP management link is inactive on the COM or MODEM
port. These ports can be used for proprietary ASCII functions.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
E-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Interface Group – “ifOperStatus” Object (ifEntry 8)
This object specifies the current operational state of the interface. The value of this
object for each interface is defined as follows:
Network T1:
The interface is up(1) when no alarm conditions exist.
The interface is down(2) when an alarm condition is active.
The interface is testing(3) when a test is active on the interface.
DTE T1:
The interface is up(1) when no alarm conditions exist and the
interface is enabled.
The interface is down(2) when an alarm condition is active and
the interface is disabled.
The interface is testing(3) when a test is active on the interface.
COM Port:
AUX Port:
When configured as an SNMP management link, up and down
are based on the current state of the link layer protocol.
Otherwise, the interface is always up(1).
The interface is never in the testing(3) state.
When configured as an SNMP management link, up and down
are based on the current state of the link layer protocol.
Otherwise, the interface is always down(2).
The interface is never in the testing(3) state.
MODEM
Port:
When configured as an SNMP management link, up and down
are based on the current state of the link layer protocol.
Otherwise, the interface is always up(1) when the modem is
connected and down(2) when the modem is not connected.
The interface is never in the testing(3) state.
Data Ports:
The interface is up(1) when the port is assigned to a T1
interface or another data port as a backup, and both CTS and
DSR are ON.
The interface is down(2) when the port is unassigned, or either
CTS or DSR is OFF.
The interface is testing(3) when a test is active on the interface.
Interface Group – “ifLastChange” Object (ifEntry 9)
This object contains the value of “sysUpTime" at the time the interface entered its
current operational state.
E-8
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Interface Group – Input Counters (objects ifEntry 10 to ifEntry 15)
These objects collect statistics on the data received by the COM port, the AUX
port, and the MODEM port when these ports are configured as SNMP
management links. For interfaces that are not configured as an SNMP
management link, these statistics are not provided and an error status is returned
if access is attempted. The objects used to collect input statistics are listed below:
ifInOctets (ifEntry 10)
ifInUcastPkts (ifEntry 11)
ifInNUcastPkts (ifEntry 12)
ifInDiscards (ifEntry 13)
ifInErrors (ifEntry 14)
ifInUnknownProtos (ifEntry 15)
Interface Group – Output Counters (objects ifEntry 16 to ifEntry 21)
These objects collect statistics on the data received by the COM port, the AUX
port, and the MODEM port when these ports are configured as SNMP
management links. For interfaces that are not configured as an SNMP
management link, these statistics are not provided and an error status is returned
if access is attempted. The objects used to collect output statistics are listed
below:
ifOutOctets (ifEntry 16)
ifOutUcastPkts (ifEntry 17)
ifOutNUcastPkts (ifEntry 18)
ifOutDiscards (ifEntry 19)
ifOutErrors (ifEntry 20)
ifOutQLen (ifEntry 21)
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
E-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
IP Group, MIB II
The IP Group objects are supported by the DSU/CSU for all data paths which
currently are configured to carry IP data to or from the DSU/CSU, including the
MODEM, COM, AUX, carrier SNMP bus, EDL, and FDL. All of the objects in the IP
Group other than the IP Address Translation table are fully supported. The IP
Address Translation table (ipNetToMediaTable) does not apply to the DSU/CSU
and will be empty (i.e., have zero entries). The following sections provide
clarification for objects contained in the IP Group when it is not clear how the
object definition in MIB II is related to the DSU/CSU.
IP Group – “ipForwarding” Object (ip 1)
This object specifies whether the unit is acting as an IP gateway in respect to the
forwarding of a datagram received by, but not addressed to, this unit. Only the
following value is supported by the DSU/CSU.
forwarding(1) – The unit is acting as a gateway.
IP Group – “ipAddrTable” Object (ip 20)
The address table is supported by the DSU/CSU.
IP Group – “ipAdEntAddr” Object (ipAddrEntry 1)
The ipAdEntAddr object is an IP address supported by the device and serves as
the index to the address table. Since indexes for tables must be unique, only one
ifIndex may be displayed for each IP address supported by the device. If you have
configured the same IP address for multiple interfaces or for default IP addresses,
you will not see all interfaces that support a particular IP address upon display of
the ipAddrTable.
IP Group – “ipAdEntIfIndex” Object (ipAddrEntry 2)
For some address table entries, the ipAdEntIfIndex object may have a value
greater than ifNumber. In these cases, the ipAdEntIfIndex refers to a proprietary
interface which is not currently implemented by the interface group of MIB II.
E-10
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
IP Group – “ipRouteTable” Object (ip 21)
The routing table used by the DSU/CSU is supported as a read/write table. Entries
in this table may be added, deleted, or changed. You should exercise great caution
when adding or modifying routes in the ipRoutingTable. In general, it should not be
necessary to add or modify routes in the DSU/CSU. In those cases where it is
deemed necessary, the routes should only be added to the connected device
(i.e., the device closest to the destination). Internal routing mechanisms will
propagate the route to the other devices.
An existing route may be effectively deleted by setting the ipRouteType object to
“invalid” for the entry to be deleted. An existing route may be modified by changing
fields in the desired entry (indexed by ipRouteDest) of the routing table. A new
route may be added by specifying values for a table entry for which the index
(“ipRouteDest”) does not already exist.
To add a route using an SNMP set, you must specify a group of minimal objects.
These variable bindings must be contained in a single Protocol Data Unit (PDU).
The objects are described in more detail in the following sections. The minimal set
consists of:
ipRouteDest
ipRouteIfIndex
The following objects are defaulted if not specified in the set PDU used to add a
route.
ipRouteMetric1 – Defaulted to 1 hop.
ipRouteMetric2 – Defaulted to current slot for carrier devices and –1 for
standalone devices.
ipRouteType – Defaulted to indirect.
ipRouteMask – Defaulted as specified in the MIB description.
The following objects are unused in the DSU/CSU and setting them will have no
effect on the operation of the IP implementation.
ipRouteMetric3, ipRouteMetric4, ipRouteMetric5 – Defaulted to –1 as
specified in the MIB.
ipRouteNextHop – Defaulted to 0.0.0.0.
The following read-only objects must not be specified in the set PDU used to add a
route.
ipRouteProto – Set to netmgmt(3) by software.
ipRouteAge – Defaulted to 999.
ipRouteInfo – Set to OBJECT IDENTIFIER {0, 0} since it is unused.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
E-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
IP Group – “ipRouteDest” Object (ipRouteEntry 1)
The ipRouteDest object serves as the index to the routing table. Since indexes for
tables must be unique, only one route per destination may appear in the table. To
ensure that no duplicate destinations appear in the routing table, the ipRouteDest
object of the ipRouteTable will be treated as described in RFC 1354 (IP
Forwarding Table MIB):
“The destination IP address of this route. An entry with a value of 0.0.0.0 is
considered a default route. This object may not take a Multicast (Class D) address
value. Any assignment (implicit or otherwise) of an instance of this object to a
value x must be rejected if the bitwise logical – AND of x with the value of the
corresponding instance of the ipForwardMask object is not equal to x.”
IP Group – “ipRouteIfIndex” Object (ipRouteEntry 1)
When the routing table is displayed, the ipRouteIfIndex object for some entries
may have a value greater than ifNumber. In these cases, the ipRouteIfIndex refers
to a proprietary interface which is not currently implemented by the interface group
of MIB II. Route entries with an unrecognized ipRouteIfIndex value should not be
deleted.
When setting this object via SNMP, the ipRouteIfIndex value can only assume an
appropriate value of ifIndex defined for the particular device type.
IP Group – “ipRouteMetric2” Object (ipRouteEntry 4)
The following values are displayed for the ipRouteMetric2 object. For a carrier
device designated as the IP Bus Master, ipRouteMetric2 is used to designate the
slot number of the next hop associated with this route if the destination is not
connected to the device. For carrier devices not designated as the IP Bus Master
or IP Bus Master devices in which the destination is connected to the device,
ipRouteMetric2 contains the slot number (0-15) of the carrier device. For
standalone devices, ipRouteMetric2 is not used and contains –1.
When adding a route to the routing table using SNMP, do not specify a value for
ipRouteMetric2.
IP Group – “ipRouteProto” Object (ipRouteEntry 9)
This object is a read-only object and may have the following values in the
DSU/CSU.
other(1) – Temporary route added by IP.
local(2) – Route added or modified as a result of user configuration via the
front panel.
netmgmt(3) – Route added or modified by means of an SNMP set.
icmp(4) – Route added or modified by Internet Control Management Protocol
(ICMP).
rip(8) – Route added or modified by Routing Information Protocol (RIP) (or
similar proprietary protocol).
E-12
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
IP Group – “ipRouteAge” Object (ipRouteEntry 10)
This object is implemented as a read-only object in the DSU/CSU. In the
DSU/CSU, it reflects the value of the route’s time-to-live (in seconds). When
displays, a value of 999 represents a route that is retained permanently. For
temporary routes, the ipRouteAge object decrements over time. All routes added
via an SNMP set of the ipRouteTable are considered permanent routes. These
routes do not age, but will remain unless deleted via SNMP.
ICMP Group, MIB II
The ICMP Group objects are fully supported by the DSU/CSU.
TCP Group, MIB II
The TCP Group objects are fully supported by the DSU/CSU, with the exception of
the tcpConnState object, which will be read-only.
UDP Group, MIB II
The User Datagram Protocol (UDP) Group objects are fully supported by the
DSU/CSU.
Transmission Group, MIB II
Objects in the transmission group are supported on the network and DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interfaces, the COM port, the MODEM port, the AUX port,
and the synchronous data ports. The objects in the transmission group are not
defined within MIB II, but rather through other Internet standard MIB definitions.
The following two transmission group objects are supported by the DSU/CSU.
ds1 (transmission 18) – The transmission object supported on the T1
interfaces.
rs232 (transmission 33) – The transmission object supported on the
synchronous data ports, COM port, AUX port, and MODEM port.
The “ds1” transmission object is defined by the DS1/E1 MIB. The rs232
transmission object is defined by the RS-232-like MIB.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
E-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
SNMP Group, MIB II
The SNMP Group objects that apply to a management agent are fully supported
by the DSU/CSU. The following objects apply only to an NMS and return a zero
value if accessed.
snmpInTooBigs (snmp 8)
snmpInNoSuchNames (snmp 9)
snmpInBadValues (snmp 10)
snmpInReadOnlys (snmp 11)
snmpInGenErrs (snmp 12)
snmpInGetResponses (snmp 18)
snmpInTraps (snmp19)
snmpOutGetRequests (snmp 25)
snmpOutGetNexts (snmp 26)
snmpOutSetRequests (snmp 27)
DS1/E1 MIB (RFC 1406)
The “ds1” object defined by RFC 1406 is supported for both the network and DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interfaces. The DS1 Near End Group and DS1 Fractional
Group are supported for both interfaces. The DS1 Far End Group is not supported.
Near End Group, DS1/E1 MIB
The DS1 Near End Group consists of the following four tables:
DS1 Configuration
DS1 Current
DS1 Interval
DS1 Total
All four tables are fully supported for the network interface. Since statistics are not
kept for the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface, only the DS1 Configuration table is
fully supported. The “statistic” objects for the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface
entry in the DS1 Current, DS1 Interval, and DS1 Total tables are always zero
(null). The following sections provide clarification for objects contained in the Near
End Group when it is not clear how the object definition in the DS1/E1 MIB is
related to the DSU/CSU.
E-14
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Near End Group – “dsx1TimeElapsed” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 3)
Applies to the network interface only. An error status is returned if access is
attempted for the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Near End Group – “dsx1ValidIntervals” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 4)
Applies to the network interface only. An error status is returned if access is
attempted for the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Near End Group – “dsx1LineType” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 5)
This object corresponds to the NET Framing/DTE Framing configuration options
for the T1 interfaces on the DSU/CSU. Only the following values are supported by
the DSU/CSU.
dsx1ESF(2) – Indicates ESF framing.
dsx1D4(2) – Indicates D4 framing.
Near End Group – “dsx1LineCoding” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 6)
This object corresponds to the NET Coding/DTE Coding configuration options for
the T1 interfaces on the DSU/CSU. Only the following values are supported by the
DSU/CSU.
dsx1B8ZS(2) – Indicates B8ZS line coding.
dsx1AMI(5) – Indicates AMI line coding.
Near End Group – “dsx1SendCode” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 7)
This object specifies the test patterns/codes being sent over the network interface.
These tests are not supported on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface. Only the
following values are supported by the DSU/CSU.
dsx1SendNoCode(1) – Specifies that the interface is sending normal or
looped data. Setting the interface to this value stops an active “send pattern”
test on the interface. This is the only value supported by the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface.
dsx1SendLineCode(2) – Specifies that the network interface is sending a
Remote Loopback (Rlpbk) LLBUP code. The code is sent for 10 seconds.
dsx1SendResetCode(4) – Specifies that the network interface is sending
Remote Loopback (Rlpbk) LLBDN code. The code is sent for 10 seconds.
dsx1SendQRS(5) – Specifies that the network interface is sending a QRSS
test pattern. The pattern is sent until the test is halted (i.e., setting to
dsx1SendNoCode).
dsx1SendOtherTestPattern(8) – Specifies that the network interface is sending
a 1-in-8 test pattern. The pattern is sent until the test is halted (i.e., setting to
dsx1SendNoCode).
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
E-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Near End Group – “dsx1CircuitIdentifier” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 8)
This object is only supported on the Net T1 Interface.
Near End Group – “dsx1LoopbackConfig” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 9)
This object specifies the loopback state of the T1 interfaces. Only the following
values are supported by the DSU/CSU.
dsx1NoLoop(1) – The T1 interface is not in a loopback state.
dsx1PayloadLoop(2) – Specifies that a Payload Loopback (PLB) is active for
the network interface or a Repeater Loopback (RLB) is active for the DTE
Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
dsx1LineLoop(3) – Specifies that a Line Loopback (LLB) is active for the
network interface or a DTE Loopback (DLB) is active for the DTE Drop/Insert
(DSX-1) interface.
Near End Group – “dsx1LineStatus” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 10)
This object specifies the line (alarm) status of the T1 interfaces. Only the following
values are supported by the DSU/CSU. More than one value may be active at a
time.
dsx1NoAlarm(1) – No alarm present.
dsx1RcvFarEndLOF(2) – A yellow alarm signal is being received.
dsx1RcvAIS(8) – An Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is being received.
dsx1LossOfFrame(32) – An Out Of Frame condition has persisted for more
that 2.5 seconds (i.e., Red Alarm).
dsx1LossOfSignal(64) – A Loss of Signal condition has persisted for more that
2.5 seconds (i.e., Red Alarm).
dsx1LoopbackState(128) – The near end of the T1 interface is in a loopback
state.
dsx1Other Failure(4096) – An Excessive Error Rate (EER) has been detected
on the network interface.
Near End Group – “dsx1SignalMode” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 11)
This object specifies whether Robbed Bit Signaling (RBS) is being used. This
object differs from the MIB definition in that it is “read-only" (not read/write) for
DSU/CSUs. Only the following values are supported by the DSU/CSU.
none(1) – No signaling is being used on this interface.
robbedBit(2) – Robbed Bit Signaling is being used on at least one DS0 on this
T1 interface.
E-16
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Near End Group – “dsx1TransmitClockSource” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 12)
This object specifies the timing source for the transmit clock for this T1 interface.
This object differs from the MIB definition in that it is “read-only” (not read/write) for
DSU/CSUs. Only the following values are supported by the DSU/CSU.
loopTiming(1) – The recovered receive clock is being used as the transmit
clock.
localTiming(2) – The DSU/CSU’s internal clock is used being as the transmit
clock.
ThroughTiming(3) – The recovered receive clock from another interface
(e.g., T1, Port, or External) is being used as the transmit clock.
Near End Group – “dsx1Fdl” Object (dsx1ConfigEntry 13)
This object specifies how Facility Data Link is being used. Only the following
values are supported by the DSU/CSU. More than one value may be active at a
time.
dsx1other(1) – SNMP data is being sent over FDL.
dsx1Ansi-T1-403(2) – ANSI PRMs are supported on the network interface as
specified by ANSI T1.403.
dsx1Att-54016(4) – FDL supports the requirements specified by AT&T
publication TR54016.
dsx1Fdl-none(8) – Indicates that the device does not use FDL. This is the only
value that applies to the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface.
Near End Group – The DS1 Current Table Objects (dsx1CurrentEntry)
The following DS1 current table objects are provided for the network interface only.
Objects in the table that are not listed are not supported and will return an error
status if access is attempted.
dsx1CurrentIndex – The index that identifies the T1 interface.
dsx1CurrentESs – Errored Seconds for the current interval.
dsx1Current SESs – Severely Errored Seconds for the current interval.
dsx1CurrentUASs – Unavailable Seconds for the current interval.
dsx1CurrentCSSs – Controlled Slip Seconds for the current interval.
dsx1CurrentBESs – Bursty Errored Seconds for the current interval.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
E-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Near End Group – The DS1 Interval Table Objects (dsx1IntervalEntry)
The following DS1 interval table objects are provided for the network interface only.
Objects in the table that are not listed are not supported and will return an error
status if access is attempted.
dsx1IntervalIndex – The index that identifies the T1 interface.
dsx1IntervalNumber – The interval number (1 to 96).
dsx1IntervalESs – Errored Seconds for the interval.
dsx1Interval SESs – Severely Errored Seconds for the interval.
dsx1IntervalUASs – Unavailable Seconds for the interval.
dsx1IntervalCSSs – Controlled Slip Seconds for the interval.
dsx1Interval BESs – Bursty Errored Seconds for the interval.
Near End Group – The DS1 Total Table Objects (dsx1TotalEntry)
The following DS1 total table objects are provided for the network interface only.
Objects in the table that are not listed are not supported and will return an error
status if access is attempted.
dsx1TotalIndex – The index that identifies the T1 interface.
dsx1TotalESs – The 24-hour total Errored Seconds.
dsx1Total SESs – The 24-hour total Severely Errored Seconds.
dsx1TotalUASs – The 24-hour total Unavailable Seconds.
dsx1TotalCSSs – The 24-hour total Controlled Slip Seconds.
dsx1TotalBESs – The 24-hour total Bursty Errored Seconds.
Far End Group, DS1/E1 MIB
The DS1 Far End Group consists of the following three tables:
DS1 Far End Current
DS1 Far End Interval
DS1 Far End Total
These tables are not supported for either the network or DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1)
interface.
E-18
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
DS1 Fractional Group, DS1/E1 MIB
The DS1 Fractional Group consists of the DS1 fractional table. This table
(dsx1FracTable) is fully supported by the DSU/CSU and allows channel (time
slots) to be mapped between the T1 interfaces and data ports. If an invalid channel
map (e.g., two interfaces mapped to a single time slot, one interface mapped to
two T1s, etc.) is received, an error will be returned to the SNMP manager. The
DSU/CSU will validate all channel configurations before applying them.
Operational Note: The fractional T1 group only allows specification of an entire
interface to a particular time slot on another interface (i.e., a time slot on one
interface cannot be mapped to a time slot on another interface). This prevents
complete mapping of time slots on the DTE Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface to time
slots on the network interface. For mapping time slots between the network and
DTE T1 interfaces, the following convention is used: Time slots on the T1 interface
that are mapped to another T1 interface (i.e., not a data port) are connected in
ascending order. For example, if the fractional table for the network interface maps
time slots 1, 3 and 5 to the DTE T1 interface and the DTE T1 interface maps time
slots 10, 11 and 15 to the network the following time slots will be connected: N1 to
D10, N3 to D11 and N5 to D15.
RS-232-like MIB (RFC 1317)
The “rs232” object defined by RFC 1317 is supported for all of the synchronous
data ports, the MODEM port, the COM port, and the AUX port. The RS-232-like
MIB consists of one object and five tables, as follows:
Number of RS-232-like ports
The General Port Table
The Asynchronous Port Table
The Synchronous Port Table
The Input Signal Table
The Output Signal Table
The Asynchronous Port table is not supported by the DSU/CSU for the
synchronous data ports. The Input Signal and Output Signal tables are not
supported for the MODEM, AUX, and COM ports. The following sections provide
clarification for objects contained in the RS-232-like MIB when it is not clear how
the object definition in MIB is related to the DSU/CSU.
Number of Ports – “rs232Number” Object (rs232 1)
This object contains the number of ports in the RS-232-like general port table. This
number is 5 for the 3160, 7 for the 3164, 3 for the 3165 and 2 for the 3161.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
E-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
General Port Table, RS-232-like MIB
The general port table contains general configuration objects for the RS-232-like
interfaces.
General Port Table – “rs232PortIndex” Object (rs232PortEntry 1)
This object contains a unique value for each port and is used as an index into the
general port table (rs232PortTable). The values of the rs232PortIndex object vary
between models and are listed below.
The values of rs232PortIndex for the 3160 DSU/CSU are:
1 – COM port
2 – Modem port
3 – Auxiliary RS-232 port
4 – DCE port 1
5 – DCE port 2
The values of rs232PortIndex for the carrier 3161 DSU/CSU are:
1 – DCE port 1
2 – DCE port 2 or COM port (depending upon configuration)
The values of rs232PortIndex for the 3164 DSU/CSU are:
1 – COM port
2 – Modem port
3 – Auxiliary RS-232 port
4 – DCE port 1
5 – DCE port 2
6 – DCE port 3
7 – DCE port 4
The values of rs232PortIndex for the 3165 DSU/CSU are:
1 – COM port
2 – Modem port
3 – DCE port 1
E-20
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
General Port Table – “rs232PortType” Object (rs232PortEntry 2)
This object is used to identify the port’s hardware type. Only the following values
are supported by the DSU/CSU.
rs232(2) – Used to identify the MODEM, AUX, and COM ports.
rs422(3) – Used to identify synchronous data ports that are configured as
EIA-530A or RS-449.
V35(5) – Used to identify synchronous data ports that are configured as V.35.
General Port Table – “rs232PortInSigNumber” Object (rs232PortEntry 3)
This object contains the number of input signals contained in the input signal table.
This is the number of signals that can be detected. This number is 2 for the
synchronous data ports and 0 for the MODEM, AUX, and COM ports.
General Port Table – “rs232PortOutSigNumber” Object (rs232PortEntry 4)
This object contains the number of output signals contained in the output signal
table. This is the number of signals that can be asserted. This number is 2 for the
synchronous data ports and 0 for the MODEM, AUX, and COM ports.
General Port Table – “rs232PortInSpeed” Object (rs232PortEntry 5)
This object contains the port’s input speed in bits per second. For the DSU/CSU,
the rs232PortInSpeed object has the same value as the rs232PortOutSpeed
object. The input speed of a synchronous data port is determined by the channel
configuration and cannot be changed through this object. Thus, for the
synchronous data ports, this object is read-only. The input speed of the MODEM,
AUX, or COM port is the currently configured speed. Setting of this value for the
MODEM, AUX, or COM port causes the configured port speed to be changed.
General Port Table – “rs232PortOutSpeed” Object (rs232PortEntry 6)
This object contains the port’s output speed in bits per second. For the DSU/CSU,
the rs232PortInSpeed object has the same value as the rs232PortOutSpeed
object. The input speed of a synchronous data port is determined by the channel
configuration and cannot be changed through this object. Thus, for the
synchronous data ports, this object is read-only. The input speed of the MODEM,
AUX, or COM port is the currently configured speed. Setting of this value for the
MODEM, AUX, or COM port causes the configured port speed to be changed.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
E-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Asynchronous Port Table, RS-232-like MIB
The asynchronous port table contains an entry for the MODEM, AUX, or COM port
when the port is configured for asynchronous operation. For the DSU/CSU, the
entries in the table that are counters (rs232AsyncPortEntry 6–8) are used to
collect statistics and are not supported.
Asynchronous Port Table, “rs232AsyncPortBits” (rs232AsyncPortEntry 2)
This object specifies the number of bits in a character. Only the following values
are supported by the DSU/CSU.
7 – 7-bit characters. Supported on the COM and MODEM ports only.
8 – 8-bit characters.
Asynchronous Port Table, “rs232AsyncPortStopBits”
(rs232AsyncPortEntry 3)
This object specifies the number of stop bits supported. Only the following values
are supported by the DSU/CSU.
one(1) – One stop bit.
two(2) – Two stop bits. Supported on the COM and MODEM ports only.
one-and-half(3) – One and a half stop bits. Supported on the COM port only.
Asynchronous Port Table, “rs232AsyncPortParity” (rs232AsyncPortEntry 4)
This object specifies the parity used by the port. Only the following values are
supported by the DSU/CSU.
none(1) – No parity bit.
odd(2) – Odd parity. Supported on the COM and MODEM ports only.
even(3) – Even parity. Supported on the COM and MODEM ports only.
Asynchronous Port Table, “rs232AsyncPortAutoBaud”
(rs232AsyncPortEntry 5)
This object specifies the ability to automatically sense the input speed of the port.
Only the following value is supported by the DSU/CSU.
disabled(2) – Autobaud is not supported.
E-22
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Synchronous Port Table, RS-232-like MIB
The synchronous port table contains an entry for each of the synchronous data
ports and the MODEM or COM port when the port is configured for synchronous
operation. For the DSU/CSU, the entries in the table that are counters
(rs232SyncPortEntry 3–7) are used to collect statistics and are not supported.
Synchronous Port Table – “rs232SyncPortClockSource”
(rs232SyncPortEntry 2)
This object specifies the clock source for the port. Only the following values are
supported by the DSU/CSU.
internal(1) – The port uses an internal clock.
external(2) – The port uses an external clock.
Input Signal Table, RS-232-like MIB
This table contains entries for the input signals that can be detected by the unit for
each of the synchronous data ports.
Input Signal Table – “rs232InSigName” (rs232InSigEntry 2)
This object contains the identification of a hardware input signal. Only the following
values are supported by the DSU/CSU.
rts(1) – Request-To-Send.
dtr(4) – Data Terminal Ready.
Input Signal Table – “rs232InSigState” (rs232InSigEntry 3)
This object contains the current signal state. Only the following values are
supported by the DSU/CSU.
on(2) – The signal is asserted.
off(3) – The signal is not asserted.
Input Signal Table – “rs232InSigChanges” (rs232InSigEntry 4)
This object is not supported by the DSU/CSU.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
E-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Output Signal Table, RS-232-like MIB
This object contains entries for the output signals that can be asserted by the unit
for each of the synchronous data ports.
Output Signal Table – “rs232OutSigName” (rs232OutSigEntry 2)
This object contains the identification of a hardware output signal. Only the
following values are supported by the DSU/CSU.
cts(1) – Clear-To-Send.
dsr(4) – Data Set Ready.
Output Signal Table – “rs232OutSigState” (rs232OutSigEntry 3)
This object contains the current signal state. Only the following values are
supported by the DSU/CSU.
on(2) – The signal is asserted.
off(3) – The signal is not asserted.
Output Signal Table – “rs232OutSigChanges” (rs232OutSigEntry 4)
This object is not supported by the DSU/CSU.
Generic-Interface MIB Extensions (RFC 1229)
This generic-interface MIB is an experimental MIB that provides extensions to the
generic interface group defined in MIB II. This MIB describes three tables:
Generic Interface Extension Table
Generic Interface Test Table
Generic Receive Address Table
Only the generic interface test table is supported by the DSU/CSU. This table is
supported for the network interface only.
E-24
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Generic Interface Test Table, Generic Interface MIB
The test table provides access to additional tests (loopbacks and pattern tests)
that are not in the interface group of MIB II.
Generic Interface Test Table – “ifExtnsTestType” Object (ifExtnsTestEntry 4)
This object is a control variable used to start and stop operator-initiated tests on
the interface. It provides the capability to:
Start/stop the Monitor QRSS test pattern on the network interface.
Start/stop the Send QRSS/511 test pattern on a synchronous data port.
Start sending a V.54/FT1 UP/DOWN code to the remote unit for a
synchronous data port.
Start/stop the Monitor QRSS/511 test pattern on a synchronous data port.
Start/stop the DCLB/DTLB loopback test on a synchronous data port.
The following object identifiers are used to control the tests on the interface.
noTest – Stops the test in progress on the interface.
testFullDuplexLoopBack – Initiates a DCLB on the interface. Only supported
for the data ports.
testLoopDTLB – Initiates a DTLB on the interface. Only supported for the data
ports.
testMonQRSS – Initiates a Monitor QRSS test on the interface. Supported for
the data ports and the network interface.
testMon511 – Initiates a Monitor 511 test on the interface. Only supported for
the data ports.
testSendQRSS – Initiates a Send QRSS test on the interface. Only supported
for the data ports.
testSend511 – Initiates a send 511 test on the interface. Only supported for
the data ports.
testSendV54Up – Sends a V54 up code to the remote unit. Only supported for
the data ports.
testSendV54Down – Sends a V54 down code to the remote unit. Only
supported for the data ports.
testSendFT1Up – ends a FT1 up code to the remote unit. Only supported for
the data ports.
testSendFT1Down – Sends a FT1 down code to the remote unit. Only
supported for the data ports.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
E-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Where these object identifiers are defined as follows:
testLoopDTLB – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 2]
testMonQRSS – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 3]
testMon511 – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 4]
testSendQRSS – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 5]
testSend511 – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 6]
testSendV54Up – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 7]
testSendV54Down – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 8]
testSendFT1Up – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 9]
testSendFT1Down – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownTests 10]
Generic Interface Test Table – “ifExtnsTestResult” Object
(ifExtnsTestEntry 5)
This object contains the result of the most recently requested test. Only the
following values are supported by the DSU/CSU.
none(1) – No test currently active.
inProgress(3) – A test is currently in progress.
notSupported(4) – The requested test is not supported.
unAbleToRun(5) – The requested test cannot run due to the state of the unit.
Generic Interface Test Table – “ifExtnsTestCode” Object
(ifExtnsTestEntry 6)
This object contains a code that contains more specific information on the test
result. This object is defined as an object identifier. Only the following values are
supported by the DSU/CSU.
none – No further information is available. Used for the send pattern/code and
loopback tests.
inSyncNoBitErrors – A monitor pattern (QRSS or 511) test has synchronized
on the pattern and has not detected any bit errors.
inSyncWithBitErrors – A monitor pattern (QRSS or 511) test has synchronized
on the pattern and has detected bit errors.
notInSync – A monitor pattern (QRSS or 511) test has not synchronized on
the requested pattern.
E-26
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Where these object identifiers are defined as follows:
wellKnownCodes – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [ifExtensions 5]
none – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownCodes 1]
inSyncNoBitErrors – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownCodes 2]
inSyncWithBitErrors – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownCodes 3]
notInSync – OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= [wellKnownCodes 4]
Enterprise MIB
The variable devConfigAreaCopy under the devConfigAreaCopy group in the
common area of the Enterprise MIB will be fully supported. This variable allows
the entire contents of one configuration area to be copied into another
configuration area.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
E-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Correlation between Menu Commands and SNMP Objects
correlation between how a function is performed or status is displayed on the front
panel and how the same function is accomplished using access to the SNMP
database. SNMP objects are displayed in bold type while values for SNMP
objects are displayed in italics.
DSU ESF
Test
Ctrl
Stat
Cnfig
ACO
❚
LED
Reset Passwd
ClrReg CID DL
EQPT NET
User Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4
Mon
DevHS
STest Perf TStat LED ID
Rel
Call
Telco
User
Prtn T1 Prtn
Rlpbk
Lpbk
Ptrns
Lamp
Near
Far
Pass Dial Disc ChDir
Cur 24Tot Intvl
❚
Cur 8Tot Intvl
Abort Send
Mon
1 . . 5,A
1 . . 5,A
(Directory)
(Directory)
Near
Far
QRSS 511
QRSS 1in8 511
LLBUP LLBDN 54UP 54DN FT1UP FT1DN
DTE Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4
Abort LLB PLB DLB RLB DCLB DTLB
Load Edit Area From:
Activ Cust1 Cust2 Fact1 Fact2
Choose Function:
Edit
Save
Activ Cust1 Cust2
DTE
Port
NET
Chan
Gen
User
Alarm
Mgmt
Copy Prt1
Port Select :
Prt2
Prt3
Prt4
Gen Trap
Dsply Clear DTE Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4
All Prt1 Prt2 Prt3 Prt4
❚ For Carrier-Mounted DSU/CSUs only
For Standalone DSU/CSUs only
For 2-port and 4-port DSU/CSUs only
❚
496-14945
E-28
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Table E-1. SNMP MIB to Front Panel Command Cross-Reference (1 of 3)
Front Panel Command
SNMP MIB Object
Stat–>DevHS:
LOS at NET
OOF at NET
Yellow at NET
AIS at NET
Read the dsx1LineStatus object for NET T1
dsx1LossOfSignal
dsx1LossOfFrame
dsx1RcvFarEnd
dsx1RcvAIS
EER at NET
dsx1OtherFailure
Stat–>DevHS:
LOS at DTE
OOF at DTE
Yellow at DTE
AIS at DTE
Read the dsx1LineStatus object for DTE T1
dsx1LossOfSignal
dsx1LossOfFrame
dsx1RcvFarEnd
dsx1RcvAIS
Stat–>Perf –>Telco–>Cur:
Read the value in the following objects for NET T1
dsx1TimeElapsed
CurTimer
ES
dsx1CurrentES
UAS
dsx1CurrentUAS
SES
dsx1CurrentSES
BES
dsx1CurrentBES
CSS
dsx1CurrentCSS
Stat–>Perf–>Telco–>Intvl–>Dsply:
Select the interval number with dsx1IntervalNumber. Read the
value in the following objects for NET T1
dsx1IntervalES
ES
UAS
dsx1IntervalUAS
dsx1IntervalSES
dsx1IntervalBES
dsx1IntervalCSS
dsx1ValidIntervals
SES
BES
CSS
VldIntvl
Stat–>Perf–>Telco–>24Tot:
Read the value in the following objects for NET T1
dsx1ValidIntervals
dsx1TotalES
VldIntvl
ES
UAS
dsx1TotalUAS
dsx1TotalSES
dsx1TotalBES
dsx1TotalCSS
SES
BES
CSS
Stat–>Tstat:
Read:
LLB Test Active
PLB Test Active
RLB Test Active
DLB Test Active
DCLB on Port n
DTLB on Port n
1-8 Test Active
QRSS Test Active
QRSS on Port n
511 on Port n
dsx1LineLoop from dsx1LoopbackConfig for Net T1
dsx1PayloadLoop from dsx1LoopbackConfig for Net T1
dsx1PayloadLoop from dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1
dsx1LineLoop from dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1
testFullDuplexLoopback from IfExtnsTestType for Port n
testLoopDTLB from IfExtnsTestType for Port n
dsx1SendOtherTestPattern from dsx1SendCode for Net T1
dsx1SendQRS from dsx1SendCode for Net T1
testSendQRSS from IfExtnsTestType for Port n
testSend511 from IfExtnsTestType for Port n
Monitoring QRSS
Mon QRSS, Port n
Mon511, Port n
testMonQRSS from ifExtnsTestType for Net T1
testMonQRSS from ifExtnsTestType for Port n
testMon511 from ifExtnsTestType for Port n
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
E-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Table E-1. SNMP MIB to Front Panel Command Cross-Reference (2 of 3)
Front Panel Command
SNMP MIB Object
Stat–>LED–>Prtn:
Read:
DTR
CTS
RTS
rs232InSigState from rs232InSigName == dtr
rs232outSigState from rs232OutSigName == ctr
rs232InSigState from rs232InSigName == rts
Stat–>ID:
Ser
Read the sysDescr object from the System Group
Mod
SRev
HRevCCA1
HRevCCA2
Test–>Rlpbk–>LLBUP
Set dsx1SendCode to dsx1SendLineCode
Test–>Rlpbk–>LLBDN
Set dsx1SendCode to dsx1SendResetCode
Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testSendV54Up
Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testSendV54Down
Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testSendFT1UP
Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testSendFT1Down
Test–>Rlpbk–>54UP–>Prtn
Test–>Rlpbk–>54DN–>Prtn
Test–>Rlpbk–>FT1UP–>Prtn
Test–>Rlpbk–>FT1DN–>Prtn
Test–>Lpbk–>LLB
Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for Net T1 to dsx1LineLoop
Test–>Lpbk–>Abort–>LLB
Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for Net T1 to dsx1NoLoop
Test–>Lpbk–>PLB
Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for Net T1 to dsx1PayloadLoop
Test–>Lpbk–>Abort–>PLB
Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for Net T1 to dsx1NoLoop
Test–>Lpbk–>DLB
Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1 to dsx1LineLoop
Test–>Lpbk–>Abort–>DLB
Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1 to dsx1NoLoop
Test–>Lpbk–>RLB
Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1 to dsx1PayloadLoop
Test–>Lpbk–>Abort–>RLB
Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for DTE T1 to dsx1NoLoop
Test–>Lpbk–>DCLB–>Prtn
Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testFullDuplexLoopBack
Test–>Lpbk–>Abort–>Lpbk–>Prtn
Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for port n to noTest
Test–>Lpbk–>DTLB–>Prtn
Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testLoopDTLB
Test–>Lpbk–>Abort–>DTLB–>Prtn
Set dsx1LoopbackConfig for port n to noTest
Test–>Prtns–>Send–>QRSS–>NET
Set dsx1SendCode for Net T1 to dsx1SendQRSS
Test–>Prtns–>Abort–>Send–>NET
Set dsx1SendCode for Net T1 to dsx1SendNoCode
Test–>Prtns–>Send–>QRSS–>Prtn
Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testSendQRS
Test–>Prtns–>Abort–>Send–>Prtn
Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to noTest
Test–>Prtns–>Send–>1in8
Set dsx1SendCode for Net T1 to dsx1SendOtherTestPattern
Test–>Prtns–>Abort–>Send–>NET
Set dsx1SendCode for Net T1 to dsx1SendNoCode
Test–>Prtns–>Send–>511–>Prtn
Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to testSend511
Test–>Prtns–>Abort–>Send–>Prtn
Set IfExtnsTestType for port n to noTest
E-30
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
Table E-1. SNMP MIB to Front Panel Command Cross-Reference (3 of 3)
Front Panel Command
SNMP MIB Object
Test–>Prtns–>Mon–>QRSS–>NET
Set ifExtnsTestType for Net T1 to testMonQRSS
Test–>Prtns–>Abort–>Mon–>NET
Set ifExtnsTestType for Net T1 to noTest
Test–>Prtns–>Mon–>QRSS–>Prtn
Set ifExtnsTestType for port n to testMonQRSS
Test–>Prtns–>Abort–>Mon–>Prtn
Set ifExtnsTestType for port n to noTest
Test–>Prtns–>Mon–>511–>Prtn
Set ifExtnsTestType for port n to testMon511
Test–>Prtns–>Abort–>Mon–>Prtn
Set ifExtnsTestType for port n to noTest
Cnfig–>Load
Cnfig–>Save
Set devConfigAreaCopy tothe desired choice (Active to
Customer1, etc.)
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>DTE–>DTE–>Framing
Set/Display dsx1LineType for DTE T1 to dsx1ESF or dsx1D4
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>DTE–>DTE–>Coding
Set/Display dsx1LineCoding for DTE T1 to dsx1B8ZS or
dsx1AMI
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>Port–>Prtn–>Port Type
Display rs232PortType for port n to rs422 or v35
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>Port–>Prtn–>TxClock
Set/Display rs232SyncPortClockSource for port n to internal or
external
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>NET–>NET–>Framing
Set/Display dsx1LineType for NET T1 to dsx1ESF or dsx1D4
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>NET–>NET–>Coding
Set/Display dsx1LineCoding for NET T1 to dsx1B8ZS or
dsx1AMI
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>NET–>ANSI PRM
Set/Display dsx1Fdl for NET T1 to dsx1Ansi-T1-403 or
dsx1Att-54016 or dsx1other
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>NET–>Mgmt Link
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>Chan–>DTE–>Assign
Set/Display dsx1FracNumber and dsx1FracIfindex for DTE T1
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>Chan–>DTE–>Voice
Display dsx1SignalMode for DTE T1 to none or robbedBit
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>Chan–>Prtn–>Assign To
Set/Display dsx1FracNumber and dsx1Fracifindex for DTE or
Net T1
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>Chan–>Display
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>Chan–>Prtn–>Port Rate
Display rs232PortInSpeed or rs232PortOutSpeed for port n
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>Gen–>Clock Src
Display dsx1TransmitClockSource for DTE T1 or NET T1
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>Com Rate
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>Aux Rate
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>Modem Rate
Set/Display rs232PortInSpeed or rs232PortOutSpeed for COM,
AUX, or MODEM port
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>Char Length
Set/Display rs232AyncPortBits for COM or MODEM port
Set/Display rs232AyncPortParity for COM or MODEM port
Set/Display rs232AyncPortStopBits for COM or MODEM port
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>MChar Len
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>CParity
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>MParity
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>CStop Bits
Cnfig–>Activ–>Edit–>User–>MStop Bits
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
E-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E. SNMP MIB Objects
E-32
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Network Addressing Scenarios
F
Overview
This appendix describes a means of configuring 31xx Series devices in an Internet
Protocol (IP) network to provide SNMP or Telnet connectivity. Since there are
many possible network addressing schemes, this appendix describes an
addressing scheme for typical customer network management system (NMS)
scenarios. This appendix is not intended to be an IP addressing or routing tutorial,
and a basic understanding of IP and 31xx Series devices is assumed.
The following notes apply to these scenarios:
Connections to remote devices may be via EDL (for 2-port and 4-port
DSU/CSUs) or FDL; however, the FDL is only available on full T1 links (not
fractional T1s). Check with the service provider to be sure that the FDL is
end-to-end (i.e., not terminated at an intermediate point within the network).
Interconnected 31xx Series devices automatically pass routing information
between them; however, a static route to the subnet(s) must be set in the
routing table of the NMS host. This route uses the 31xx Series device
connected to the LAN (via the LAN Adapter), or the NMS (via a direct PPP or
SLIP connection) as a gateway to the subnet(s). In all instances, the
addressing scheme presented works for both the LAN and the direct
connections.
Although routing table entries are maintained automatically by 31xx Series
devices, without the need for user configuration, only a maximum of 100
routes is supported for a given device.
The choice of a host address within a given subnet is completely arbitrary.
Choose any legal host address for a given subnet, without regard to the local
or remote devices.
Although the default route (to the NMS) is configurable for all devices, only
devices that have a direct external connection to an NMS (via the COM or
AUX ports) need a default route set. In the following examples, the default port
(COM or AUX) is set in the device connected to the LAN Adapter.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
F-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. IP Network Addressing Scenarios
Scenario 1
series of standalone 31xx Series devices daisy chained together, with remotes
connected via the FDL. In this scenario, all 31xx Series devices are on the same
subnet (135.18.1.0). The subnet mask for each device is FF.FF.FF.00. A static
route is set in the NMS host to subnet 135.18.1.0.
ETHERNET
135.18.40.1
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
3
6
1
0
135.18.1.2
C
O
M
NETWORK
S
P
H
E
R
E
3
6
1
0
135.18.1.3
LAN
ADAPTER
SUBNET 135.18.40.0
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
AUX/COM IP ADDRESS: 135.18.40.2
3
6
1
0
135.18.1.4
135.18.1.5
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
3
6
1
0
SUBNET 135.18.1.0
C O M S P H E R E 3 6 1 0
135.18.1.1
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
3
6
1
0
C O M S P H E R E 3 6 1 0
135.18.1.7
135.18.1.6
496-14645-03
Figure F-1. Daisy-Chained Standalone at the Central Site
F-2
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. IP Network Addressing Scenarios
Scenario 2
carrier communicating with standalone remotes. This scenario is similar to the
previous one, treating the carrier devices as the daisy-chained devices. All devices
are still on the same subnet, and the subnet mask is FF.FF.FF.00. A static route still
must be set in the NMS host to subnet 135.18.2.0.
ETHERNET
C
O
M
S
P
135.18.40.1
H
E
R
E
3
6
1
0
135.18.2.17
C
O
M
S
NETWORK
P
H
E
R
E
3
6
1
0
LAN
ADAPTER
SUBNET 135.18.40.0
135.18.2.18
COM IP ADDRESS: 135.18.40.3
FT1
SUBNET 135.18.2.0
T1
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
3
6
1
0
135.18.2.26
135.18.2.1
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
3
0
0
0
135.18.2.16
496-14646-02
Figure F-2. Local Carrier with Remote Standalone
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
F-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. IP Network Addressing Scenarios
Scenario 3
shows a local carrier connected to remote carriers that have remote standalones.
Each carrier must be on a separate subnet but, as in the previous scenario, the
carrier-remote combination can share a common subnet. Once again, the subnet
mask is FF.FF.FF.00 for all devices. A static route must be set up in the NMS host
for each subnet: 135.18.4.0, 135.18.6.0, 135.18.20.0.
135.18.6.22
135.18.20.23
T1
T1
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
3
6
1
0
3
6
1
0
T1
T1
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
3
6
1
0
3
6
1
0
135.18.6.34
135.18.20.45
C
C
O
O
M
M
S
S
P
P
H
H
E
E
R
R
E
E
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
SUBNET 135.18.6.0
SUBNET 135.18.20.0
T1
ETHERNET
T1
LAN
ADAPTER
COM IP
ADDRESS:
135.18.40.4
135.18.40.1
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
3
0
0
0
SUBNET 135.18.40.0
SUBNET 135.18.4.0
Figure F-3. Local Carrier Connected to Remote Carriers
F-4
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. IP Network Addressing Scenarios
Scenario 4
An alternative addressing scheme, for the network is shown in Figure F-4, Local
subnet mask of FF.FF.00.00 for the COM port in the central-site carrier (only), with
all of the remaining subnet masks set to FF.FF.FF.00. The advantage to this
scheme is that only one route must be added to the NMS host (135.18.0.0).
135.19.6.22
135.19.20.23
T1
T1
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
3
6
1
0
3
6
1
0
T1
T1
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
3
6
1
0
3
6
1
0
135.19.6.34
135.19.20.45
C
C
O
O
M
M
S
S
P
P
H
H
E
E
R
R
E
E
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
T1
ETHERNET
T1
COM IP
ADDRESS:
135.18.40.4
LAN
ADAPTER
COM
SUBNET MASK:
FF:FF:00:00
135.18.40.1
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
3
0
0
0
SUBNET 135.18.40.0
SUBNET 135.19.0.0
496-14648-02
Figure F-4. Local Carrier Connected to Remote Carriers – an Alternative
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
F-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. IP Network Addressing Scenarios
Scenario 5
Figure F-5, Multiple COM Ports Connected to Different NMSs, illustrates multiple
COM ports on the same carrier connected to different NMSs. This might be used
in service-provider applications, where some of the carrier's circuit cards (and their
remotes) are managed by one NMS and other cards are managed by a different
NMS. In this example, each card and remote is on a separate subnet. Also, note
that each LAN Adapter connection is on a different subnet. The subnet mask is
FF.FF.FF.00. The NMS hosts would only need routes added for the subnets that
they are to manage.
SUBNET 135.18.23.0
SUBNET 135.18.34.0
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
3
6
1
0
C O M
S P H E R E 3 6 1 0
T1
T1
135.18.23.2
135.18.34.2
COM IP
COM IP
ADDRESS:
135.18.40.5
ADDRESS:
135.140.22.95
135.18.22.1 . . . . 135.18.37.1
LAN
ADAPTER
LAN
ADAPTER
C
O
M
S
P
H
E
R
E
3
0
0
0
135.140.22.79
135.18.40.1
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
SUBNET 135.140.22.0
SUBNET 135.18.40.0
496-14649-02
Figure F-5. Multiple COM Ports Connected to Different NMSs
F-6
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Panel Emulation
G
Overview
The DSU/CSU offers functionality through Front Panel Emulation software that is
similar to that provided by the DSU/CSU front panel. The DSU/CSU can either be
locally or remotely attached to a 386 or higher PC that has at least 4 MB of RAM.
A copy of the DSU/CSU front panel appears on the PC. The functionality of the
front panel is available by clicking on the Function keys with the mouse rather than
by pressing keys from the actual front panel.
For carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs, a single PC is used to access all of the slots in
the carrier. The PC is connected locally to a single slot containing either a 3151
CSU or 3161 DSU/CSU that has been configured to enable a shared COM port on
the Auxiliary Backplane. The attached PC can access any 3151/3161 device
attached to the Auxiliary Backplane. For more information about using the COM
port on the carrier, refer to the ACCULINK 3151 CSU and 3161 DSU/CSU General
Information Guide.
Installing Front Panel Emulation Software
The Front Panel Emulation software is supplied on a 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB,
double-sided, high-density, write-protected diskette, with 15 sectors per track,
80 tracks per side, and 96 tracks per inch.
This software must be installed on a 386 or higher PC with Microsoft Windows
Release 3.1 or higher, MS-DOS 3.3 or higher, and at least 4 MB of RAM. A VGA
color monitor with VGA adapter (or higher resolution) is required. A mouse is also
required. The following procedures must be performed in the Windows
environment.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G. Front Panel Emulation
Procedure
To install Front Panel Emulation software:
1. Insert the diskette into the appropriate drive.
2. Select File from Program Manager.
3. Choose Run.
4. Type A:INSTALL and click OK.
5. An Information screen appears. Choose Continue to continue the installation.
6. Type the letter of the destination drive, followed by a colon (default is C:), then
the appropriate directory name (default is C:\FRONTPAN).
If the selected directory already exists, the following message appears: The
specified directory already exists. Do you want to
overwrite the directory?
If the selected directory is new, the following message appears: The
specified directory does not exist. Do you want to create
the directory?
7. Select Yes. A confirmation screen appears. Select Install to continue the
installation.
8. A Setup Completed screen appears. Select Continue. The Program Manager
screen appears with the Front Panel icon.
G-2
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G. Front Panel Emulation
Starting Front Panel Emulation
If the DSU/CSU selected is not locally attached to the PC, you must first dial to the
remote DSU/CSU before starting front panel emulation. The modem attached to
the PC must support AT commands for the Front Panel Emulation software to
successfully place the call.
Procedure
To start front panel emulation:
1. From the PC, open Program Manager from Windows.
2. Double click on the Front Panel icon that appears after the Front Panel
Emulation program is installed on the PC. The Front Panel window opens.
3. Double click on the Front Panel icon that appears in the Front Panel window.
The Front Panel Emulation screen appears.
4. Enter the Com Port and Speed from the drop-down selection list boxes.
The Com Port field needs to contain the actual communications port name as
recorded in the Windows information file (INI).
The Speed field needs to contain one of the following communications
speeds: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, or 38400 and should match
the DSU/CSU’s COM port configuration.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
G-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G. Front Panel Emulation
5. Choose either a Local (for near-end DSU/CSU) or Remote (for far-end
DSU/CSU) destination.
6. If you chose a Local destination, click on the Execute button. If you chose a
Remote destination, enter the telephone number of the far-end DSU/CSU in
the Phone Number field, then click on the Dial button.
7. The front panel of the selected DSU/CSU appears on the PC.
NOTE:
When using Front Panel Emulation, no LEDs are shown on the PC’s
screen; you must use the Stat command procedure to get LED information
G-4
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Asynchronous Terminal Operation
H
Overview
You can configure and manage the DSU/CSU from an asynchronous (async)
terminal that is configured for 9.6 kbps, 8 characters, no parity, and 1 stop bit.
This appendix provides operational examples to help you become familiar with the
use of the async terminal for DSU/CSU control.
By convention throughout this appendix, examples of screens are shown as they
appear with the standalone 4-port DSU/CSU.
Before Using the Asynchronous Terminal
You can connect the async terminal directly to the COM port of the DSU/CSU, or
you can establish a remote connection using dial-in (via the integral modem) or
Telnet access.
Before using the async terminal, you may use the DSU/CSU’s front panel to set
certain configuration options for async terminal operation. Use the Configuration
(Cnfig) branch of the front panel menu and edit the User Interface (User)
configuration options for async terminal operation. Refer to Changing
To connect the async terminal to the DSU/CSU using Telnet access, refer to
If the DSU/CSU is misconfigured, leaving it in a state that does not support async
terminal operation, the recovery procedure consists of power cycling the
DSU/CSU, waiting for the completion of the power-up self-test, and then pressing
the async terminal’s Return key five times in succession. (Begin pressing the
Return key within two seconds after the completion of power-up self-test, and do
not wait longer than one second between each successive key press.) This
procedure allows you to use the System Paused screen to reset the COM port
configuration options or to reload all factory default configuration options.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
H-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Initiating an Asynchronous Terminal Session
Once the appropriate configuration option changes have been made and access is
established, the Main Menu screen appears (unless a password is required).
Figure H-1, Main Menu Screen, shows the Main Menu screen for a standalone
DSU/CSU.
The carrier-mounted DSU/CSU shows the 3000 Series carrier slot number under
the Customer ID. The slot number field (e.g., Slot: 1) is changed to access specific
DSU/CSUs in the carrier. For Telnet or SNMP access to the carrier, specify the IP
NOTE:
By convention throughout this appendix, examples of screens are shown as
they appear with the standalone DSU/CSU.
If a password is required, the Login screen displays the prompt for password input.
To move between the Screen area and the Screen Function Keys area
From the Screen area, you may select the Status, Test, Configuration, or
Control branches.
H-2
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Ending an Asynchronous Terminal Session
To end the async terminal session from any screen, press Ctrl-a to move from the
and then select Exit.
main
Customer ID: Node A
Slot: xx
Model: 31xx
MAIN MENU
Status
Test
Configuration
Control
Screen Area
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Screen
Function
Keys Area
Ctrl-a to access these functions
Exit
Figure H-1. Main Menu Screen
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
H-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Menu Organization
Async terminal menus differ from front panel menus in that they typically do not
use abbreviations and, in some cases, provide a more direct access to an option
or function.
Figure H-2, Menu Organization, shows the organization of the async terminal
menu tree.
Main
Status
Test
Configuration
Control
Call
Directories
Start
Download
System
Select
Select
LEDs
Administer
Password
Cross Connect
Status
Display
LEDs
Performance
Statistics
Identity
Call
Setup
Customer ID
Reset
Device
System and
Test Status
Alarm
Relay
Monitor
Jack
Cut-Off
DTE Channel
Display
Network &
DTE Tests
Sync Data
Port Tests
Device
Tests
Network
Channel
Display
Port
Assignment
Display
Abort
Tests
Configuration
Edit/Display
Sync Data
Port
Network
Clear
Statistics
Network
DTE
Sync Data
Ports
Copy
Ports
Cross
Connect
General
Options
User
Interface
Alarms Management
& Traps
and
Communication
DTE to
Network
Sync Data
Port
Clear
Assignments
Assignments Assignments
Communication
Port
Front
Panel
Telnet
Sessions
Auxiliary
Port
Internal
Modem
External
Device
Communication General SNMP
Protocol Management
SNMP NMS
Security
SNMP
Traps
496-14997
Figure H-2. Menu Organization
H-4
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Using Asynchronous Terminal Screens
There are three types of async terminal screens.
Menu screens list selections available through the menu system.
Input screens allow you to edit or change information on a screen using
Display screens show the results from a data collection operation or they
display device-specific information.
The async terminal supports character matching for entering values in fields. For
example, if the values for a field can be DTE, NET, or PORT and you enter a D and
press Return (Enter), then the field automatically populates with the value DTE.
Once an operation is initiated, status messages appear in the last row of the
screen. These include Please Wait(when a command takes longer than five
seconds) and Command Complete.
Table H-1. Screen Function Keys
Screen Function Key
M (MainMenu)
E (Exit)
Usage
Returns to the Main Menu screen.
Terminates the async terminal session.
Updates the screen with the current information.
Pages up to the previously displayed page of information.
R (Refresh)
U (PgUp)
D (PgDn)
Pages down to the previously displayed page of
information.
S (Save)
Stores changes in nonvolatile memory.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
H-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Table H-2. Keyboard Keys
Keyboard Key
Usage
Ctrl-a
Moves the cursor between the Screen area and the Screen
Function Keys area.
Esc
Returns to the previous screen.
Moves the cursor to the next field.
Moves the cursor to the previous field.
Tab
Back (Shift) Tab or Ctrl-k
Backspace
Moves the cursor one position to the left or to the last
character of the previous field.
Spacebar
Selects the next valid value for the field.
Deletes the character that the cursor is on.
Delete
Up Arrow key or Ctrl-u
Moves the cursor up one field within a column on the same
screen.
Down Arrow key or Ctrl-d
Moves the cursor down one field within a column on the
same screen.
Right Arrow key or Ctrl-f
Left Arrow key or Ctrl-b
Ctrl-l
Moves the cursor back one character to the right.
Moves the cursor back one character to the left.
Redraws the screen display.
Return (Enter)
Accepts entry.
NOTES:
— Some Telnet applications may require the use of Ctrl-u, Ctrl-d, Ctrl-f, and
Ctrl-b as an alternative to the use of the Up, Down, Right, and Left Arrow
keys.
— The following procedures are examples only. This appendix uses
examples to help you become familiar with the use of the async terminal
for DSU/CSU control.
H-6
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Setting Customer Identification
The customer identification is used to uniquely identify the DSU/CSU.
Procedure
To change the customer identification (Customer ID):
1. From the Main Menu screen, select Control.
The Control screen appears.
2. From the Control screen, select Customer ID.
The Customer ID screen appears (Figure H-3, Customer Identification
Screen).
3. Use the Customer ID field to set the customer identification.
The customer identification may be up to 8 characters long.
Select Clear to remove all the characters in the associated field.
4. Select Save to store the information in nonvolatile memory.
In addition to the customer identification, you may also enter a system name,
system location, and system contact. Although only 40 characters are displayed
for these fields, you may enter up to 255 characters. The fields scroll as the
additional characters are added.
main/control/customer id
Customer ID: Node A
Slot: xx
Model: 31xx
Customer
Identification
Field
CUSTOMER ID
Customer ID:
System Name:
System Location:
System Contact:
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
Save
MainMenu
Exit
Figure H-3. Customer Identification Screen
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
H-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Displaying LED Conditions
The same conditions monitored by the front panel LEDs can also be monitored by
the Display LEDs screen. This screen is most useful when the DSU/CSU is being
accessed remotely.
Procedure
To display LED conditions:
1. From the Main Menu screen, select Status.
The Status screen appears.
2. From the Status screen, select Display LEDs.
The Display LEDs screen appears (Figure H-4, Example of Display LEDs
Screen).
The screen shows a snapshot of the LEDs every 5 seconds. LEDs that are
illuminated are displayed by inverse video.
Select Refresh to update the screen.
main/status/leds
Customer ID: Node A
Slot: xx
Model: 31xx
DISPLAY LEDs
GENERAL
NETWORK
DTE
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 3
PORT 4
OK
Fail
Test
Sig
OOF
Alm
EER
Sig
OOF
Alm
PDV
BPV
DTR
TXD
RXD
CTS
RTS
DTR
TXD
RXD
CTS
RTS
DTR
TXD
RXD
CTS
RTS
DTR
TXD
RXD
CTS
RTS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
Refresh
MainMenu
Exit
Figure H-4. Example of Display LEDs Screen
H-8
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Changing Configuration Options
Use the Configuration branch of the main menu to display or change DSU/CSU
If the access level is not Level 1, the message Access level is 2,
Configuration is read-onlyis displayed on line 24.
Displaying or Editing Configuration Options
Procedure
To display or edit configuration options:
1. From the Main Menu screen, select Configuration.
The Load Configuration From screen appears (Figure H-5, Configuration Load
Screen).
main/config
Customer ID: Node A
Slot: xx
Model: 31xx
LOAD CONFIGURATION FROM:
Current Configuration
Customer Configuration 1
Customer Configuration 2
Default Factory Configuration 1
Default Factory Configuration 2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
MainMenu
Exit
Figure H-5. Configuration Load Screen
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
H-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
2. From the Load Configuration From screen, select a configuration option set to
load (Current, Customer 1, Customer 2, Default Factory 1, or Default
Factory 2). You cannot edit the Default Factory configuration options, but you
can display them.
After selecting the set of configuration options to load, the Configuration
main/config/edit
Customer ID: Node A
Slot: xx
Model: 31xx
CONFIGURATION EDIT/DISPLAY
Network
DTE
Sync Data Ports
Copy Ports
Cross Connect
General Options
User Interface
Alarms & Traps
Management and Communication
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
Save
MainMenu
Exit
Figure H-6. Configuration Edit/Display Screen
3. Select a functional group to display or edit.
NOTE:
Screen displays may vary depending on the model and configuration of the
DSU/CSU. For example, DTE and Copy Ports are not displayed for the
single-port DSU/CSU.
H-10
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Saving Edit Changes
Procedure
To save edit changes:
1. From the last edit screen, select Save.
Screen).
2. From the Save Configuration To screen, select a configuration option set
(Current, Customer 1, or Customer 2).
Save edit changes to the Current area when you want those changes to take effect
immediately. Save edit changes to the Customer area when you want to overwrite
the existing Customer configuration options and store these changes for future
use.
To protect you from accidentally exiting an edit session before saving your
changes, the system displays the Save Changes?prompt if you select either
MainMenu or Exit from an edit screen. If you respond No, the system exits without
saving the changes. If you respond Yes, you are prompted to specify where the
changes should be saved.
main/config/save
Customer ID: Node A
Slot: xx
Model: 31xx
SAVE CONFIGURATION TO:
Current Configuration
Customer Configuration 1
Customer Configuration 2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
MainMenu
Exit
Figure H-7. Configuration Save Screen
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
H-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Establishing Access Security on a Port
Although the password feature is available, it is not required. If used, it ensures
access security before control is passed to a device connected to a port. The
following procedure is an example only. It shows how to enable the password for
the communication port. Passwords can also be enabled for the internal modem
and for Telnet sessions.
Procedure
To establish access security on the communication port:
1. From the Main Menu screen, select Configuration.
The Load Configuration From screen appears.
2. From the Load Configuration From screen, select Current.
The Configuration Edit/Display screen appears.
3. From the Configuration Edit/Display screen, select User Interface.
The User Interface Options screen appears.
4. From the User Interface Options screen, select Communication Port.
The Communication Port Options screen appears.
Password).
6. Select Save to store this setting in nonvolatile memory.
The Save Configuration To screen appears.
7. From the Save Configuration To screen, select Current.
The password itself is set separately. Refer to the following section, Setting a
main/config/user/com
Customer ID: Node A
Slot: xx
Model: 31xx
COMMUNICATION PORT OPTIONS
Enable
Password
Port Use:
Port Type:
Data Rate (Kbps):
Character Length:
Parity:
Terminal
Asynchronous
9.6
8
None
1
Stop Bits:
Ignore Control Leads:
Disable
Password Required:
Inactivity Timeout:
Disconnect Time (Minutes):
Enable
Enable
5
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
Save
MainMenu
Exit
Figure H-8. Enabling a Password
H-12
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Setting a Password
In addition to establishing access security on a port (refer to the previous section,
Unless you specify otherwise, the password is null.
Procedure
To set a password:
1. From the Main Menu screen, select Control.
The Control screen appears.
2. From the Control screen, select Administer Password.
This screen is used to add a new password or modify an existing password.
3. Enter a new password in the Password field.
The password may be 1 to 8 characters long and may contain the characters 0
through 9, a through z, and/or A through Z.
4. Use the Re-Enter Password field to verify the new password.
5. Select Save.
Once a password is saved, the Login Records Savedmessage appears at the
bottom of the screen.
main/control/admin_password
Customer ID: Node A
Slot: xx
Model: 31xx
EnterNew
Password
PASSWORD ENTRY
Password:
Re-Enter Password:
Re-enter
Password
Save
Password
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
Save
MainMenu
Exit
Figure H-9. Setting a Password
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
H-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Entering a Password to Gain Access
When access security is required, the Login screen (Figure H-10, Entering a
Password) appears before you can access the Main Menu screen. The password
must be entered.
If the password is valid, the DSU/CSU’s top-level menu appears.
If the password is invalid, an invalid password message appears and the
screen reappears and waits for password entry.
If an invalid password is entered three consecutive times, the message User
Interface Idleappears, Telnet sessions are closed, dial-in connections
are disconnected, and an SNMP trap is generated.
login
Customer ID: Node A
Slot: xx
Model: 31xx
Enter
Password
LOGIN
Enter Password
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ctrl-a to access these functions Exit
Figure H-10. Entering a Password
H-14
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Configuration Worksheets for the Asynchronous Terminal Interface
This section contains one set of blank worksheets to be used when configuring
your DSU/CSU using the async terminal interface. In the tables, default settings
for Default Factory 1 are indicated by bold type. It is recommended that you copy
these blank worksheets before using them.
Network Interface
Options
Front Panel Equivalent
NET Framing
NET Coding
LBO
Value (Default in Bold)
D4, ESF
Line Framing Format
Line Coding Format
Line Build Out (LBO)
Management Link
Bit Stuffing
AMI, B8ZS
0.0, –7.5, –15, –22.5
Enable, Disable
62411, Part68, Disable
Enable, Disable
Enable, Disable
Enable, Disable
Mgmt Link
BitStuff
Network Initiated LLB
Network Initiated PLB
NET LLB
NET PLB
ANSI Performance Report
Messages
ANSI PRM
Circuit Identifier
Circuit Ident
Text Field, Clear
DTE Interface Options
Interface Status
Front Panel Equivalent
DTE Port
Value (Default in Bold)
Enable, Disable
D4, ESF
Line Framing Format
Line Coding Format
Line Equalization
DTE Framing
DTE Coding
Equal
AMI, B8ZS
0–133, 133–266, 266–399,
399–533, 533–655
DTE LB on External
Contact
Extrn DLB
Send Ones
Enable, Disable
Send All Ones on DTE
Failure
Enable, Disable
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
H-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Sync Data Port Options
(Port 1)
Front Panel Equivalent
Port Type
Value (Default in Bold)
E530, V.35, RS449, X.21
Nx64, Nx56
Port Type
Port Base Rate
Transmit Clock Source
Invert Transmit Clock
Base Rate
Tx Clock
Internal, External
Enable, Disable
InvertTxC
Invert Transmit and
Received Data
InvrtData
Enable, Disable
Send All Ones on Data Port All Ones
Not Ready
Disable, DTR, RTS, Both
None, Halt
Action on Network Yellow
Alarm
Rcv Yellow
Network Init. Data Channel Net DCLB
Loopback
Disable, V.54, FT1, Both
Disable, DTLB, DCLB, Both
Port (DTE) Initiated
Loopbacks
Port LB
Embedded Data Link
EDL Management Link
EDL
Enable, Disable
Mgmt Link
Err Rate
Enable, Disable
Excessive Error Rate
Threshold
10E–4, 10E–5, 10E–6,
10E–7, 10E–8, 10E–9
Near-End Performance
Statistics
Near-end
Far-end
Disable, Maintain, Send,
Both
Far-End Performance
Statistics
Disable, Maintain
H-16
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Sync Data Port Options
(Port 2)
Front Panel Equivalent
Value (Default in Bold)
E530, V.35, RS449, X.21
Nx64, Nx56
Port Type
Port Type
Base Rate
Tx Clock
InvertTxC
InvrtData
Port Base Rate
Transmit Clock Source
Invert Transmit Clock
Internal, External
Enable, Disable
Invert Transmit and
Received Data
Enable, Disable
Send All Ones on Data Port All Ones
Not Ready
Disable, DTR, RTS, Both
None, Halt
Action on Network Yellow
Alarm
Rcv Yellow
Network Init. Data Channel Net DCLB
Loopback
Disable, V.54, FT1, Both
Disable, DTLB, DCLB, Both
Port (DTE) Initiated
Loopbacks
Port LB
Embedded Data Link
EDL Management Link
EDL
Enable, Disable
Mgmt Link
Err Rate
Enable, Disable
Excessive Error Rate
Threshold
10E–4, 10E–5, 10E–6,
10E–7, 10E–8, 10E–9
Near-End Performance
Statistics
Near-end
Far-end
Disable, Maintain, Send,
Both
Far-End Performance
Statistics
Disable, Maintain
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
H-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Sync Data Port Options
(Port 3)
Front Panel Equivalent
Port Type
Value (Default in Bold)
E530, V.35, RS449, X.21
Nx64, Nx56
Port Type
Port Base Rate
Transmit Clock Source
Invert Transmit Clock
Base Rate
Tx Clock
Internal, External
Enable, Disable
InvertTxC
Invert Transmit and
Received Data
InvrtData
Enable, Disable
Send All Ones on Data Port All Ones
Not Ready
Disable, DTR, RTS, Both
None, Halt
Action on Network Yellow
Alarm
Rcv Yellow
Network Init. Data Channel Net DCLB
Loopback
Disable, V.54, FT1, Both
Disable, DTLB, DCLB, Both
Port (DTE) Initiated
Loopbacks
Port LB
Embedded Data Link
EDL Management Link
EDL
Enable, Disable
Mgmt Link
Err Rate
Enable, Disable
Excessive Error Rate
Threshold
10E–4, 10E–5, 10E–6,
10E–7, 10E–8, 10E–9
Near-End Performance
Statistics
Near-end
Far-end
Disable, Maintain, Send,
Both
Far-End Performance
Statistics
Disable, Maintain
H-18
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Sync Data Port Options
(Port 4)
Front Panel Equivalent
Value (Default in Bold)
E530, V.35, RS449, X.21
Nx64, Nx56
Port Type
Port Type
Base Rate
Tx Clock
InvertTxC
InvrtData
Port Base Rate
Transmit Clock Source
Invert Transmit Clock
Internal, External
Enable, Disable
Invert Transmit and
Received Data
Enable, Disable
Send All Ones on Data Port All Ones
Not Ready
Disable, DTR, RTS, Both
None, Halt
Action on Network Yellow
Alarm
Rcv Yellow
Network Init. Data Channel Net DCLB
Loopback
Disable, V.54, FT1, Both
Disable, DTLB, DCLB, Both
Port (DTE) Initiated
Loopbacks
Port LB
Embedded Data Link
EDL Management Link
EDL
Enable, Disable
Mgmt Link
Err Rate
Enable, Disable
Excessive Error Rate
Threshold
10E–4, 10E–5, 10E–6,
10E–7, 10E–8, 10E–9
Near-End Performance
Statistics
Near-end
Far-end
Disable, Maintain, Send,
Both
Far-End Performance
Statistics
Disable, Maintain
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
H-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
General Options
Front Panel Equivalent
Value (Default in Bold)
Generate Yellow Alarm
Signals
Gen Yellow
Enable, Disable
Initial Self Test
Self-Test
Clock Src
Enable, Disable
Primary Clock Source
Network, DTE, Internal,
External, Port 1
External Clock Rate (KHz)
Test Timeout
Clock Rate
Tst Timeout
Tst Duration
2048, 1544, 8
Enable, Disable
1–120 (Default = 10)
Test Duration
User Interface Front
Panel Options
Front Panel Equivalent
FP Access
Value (Default in Bold)
Enable, Disable
Front Panel Access
Front Panel Pass-Through
FP Pass
Enable, Disable
User Interface:
Communication Port
Options
Front Panel Equivalent
Value (Default in Bold)
Port Use
Com Use
Mgmt, ASCII, Daisy,
Terminal
Port Type
Com Type
Asynchronous,
Synchronous
Clock Source
Data Rate
Com Clk
Internal, External
Com Rate
1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 14.4, 19.2,
38.4
Character Length
Parity
Char Length
CParity
7, 8
None, Even, Odd
1, 1.5, 2
Stop Bits
CStop Bits
Ignore DTR
Password
Ignore Control Leads
Password Required
Inactivity Timeout
Disconnect Time
Disable, DTR
Enable, Disable
Enable, Disable
1–60 (Default = 5)
CmInActTm
CmDiscTm
H-20
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
User Interface: External
Device Options
Front Panel Equivalent
Com Port
Value (Default in Bold)
Enable, Disable
Nest COM Port Access
External Device Commands ComExtDev
Disable, AT, Other
Enable, Disable
Dial-In Access
Dial-In
Connect Prefix
ComConnPrefix
ComConnected
ComEscapeSeq
ComEscDel
Text Field, Clear
Connect Indication String
Escape Sequence
Text Field, Clear
Text Field, Clear
Escape Sequence Delay
(Sec)
None, 0.2, 0.4, 0.6, 0.8, 1.0
Disconnect String
ComDisconnect
Text Field, Clear
User Interface: Telnet
Sessions Options
Front Panel Equivalent
TnSession
Value (Default in Bold)
Enable, Disable
Telnet Session
Password Required
Inactivity Timeout
Disconnect Time
TnPaswd
Enable, Disable
TnInActTm
Enable, Disable
TnDiscTm
1–60 (Default = 5)
User Interface: Internal
Modem Options
Front Panel Equivalent
Modem Use
Dial-In
Value (Default in Bold)
Terminal, Mgmt, ASCII
Enable, Disable
Modem Use
Dial-In Access
Password Required
Inactivity Timeout
Disconnect Time
Modem Type
Password
Enable, Disable
MInActTm
Enable, Disable
MDiscTm
1–60 (Default = 5)
Modem Type
Asynchronous,
Synchronous
Modem Rate
Character Length
Parity
Modem Rate
MChar L
1.2, 2.4
7, 8
MParity
None, Even, Odd
1, 1.5, 2
Stop Bits
MStop Bits
LSpaceDisc
Long Space Disconnect
Enable, Disable
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
H-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
User Interface: Auxiliary
Port Options
Front Panel Equivalent
Aux Use
Value (Default in Bold)
None, Mgmt, Daisy
9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 38.4
Port Use
Data Rate (Kbps)
Aux Rate
Alarm and Trap Options Front Panel Equivalent
Value (Default in Bold)
Disable, Com Port
Enable, Disable
ASCII Alarm Messages
Alarm & Trap Dial-Out
Trap Disconnect
Alrm Msg
DialOut
Trap Disc
Call Retry
Dial Delay
Enable, Disable
Call Retry
Enable,Disable
Dial Out Delay Time (Min)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
None, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Alternate Dial-Out Directory AltDialDir
Excessive Error Rate
Threshold
Err Rate
10E–4, 10E–5, 10E–6,
10E–7, 10E–8, 10E–9
System Alarm Relay
Alrm Relay
Enable,Disable
Management and
Communication:
Communication Protocol
Options
Front Panel Equivalent
IP Adr
Value (Default in Bold)
Text Field, Clear
Node IP Address
Node Subnet Mask
Default Net Destination
NetMask
Text Field, Clear
Def Netwk
None, Com, Aux, FDL,
EDL1, EDL2
Communication Port IP Adr Com IP Adr
Text Field, Clear
Communication Port
Subnet Mask
Com NetMask
Text Field, Clear
Com Link Protocol
Com Link
PPP, SLIP
Modem IP Address
Modem Subnet Mask
Modem Alt IP Adr
Modem IP Adr
Mdm NetMask
Alt Mdm IP Adr
Alt Mdm NetMask
Modem Link
Aux IP Adr
Text Field, Clear
Text Field, Clear
Text Field, Clear
Text Field, Clear
PPP, SLIP
Modem Alt Subnet Mask
Modem Link Protocol
Auxiliary Port IP Address
Text Field, Clear
Text Field, Clear
Enable, Disable
Auxiliary Port Subnet Mask Aux NetMask
IPBusMast
IPBusMast
H-22
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
Management and
Communication:
General SNMP
Management Options
Front Panel Equivalent
Value (Default in Bold)
Enable, Disable
Text Field, Clear
Read, R/W
SNMP Management
Community Name 1
Name 1 Access
SNMP Mgt
CommunityName1
Access 1
Community Name 2
Name 2 Access
CommunityName2
Access 2
Text Field, Clear
Read, R/W
Management and
Communication:
SNMP NMS Security
Options
Front Panel Equivalent
NMS Valid
Value (Default in Bold)
Enable, Disable
NMS IP Validation
Number of Managers
NMS n IP Address
Access Level
Num Sec Mgrs
NMS n IP Adr
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Text Field, Clear
Read, R/w
NMS n Access
Management and
Communication:
SNMP Trap Options
Front Panel Equivalent
SNMP Trap
Value (Default in Bold)
Enable, Disable
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
SNMP Traps
Number of Trap Managers
Trap n IP Address
Num Trap Mgrs
Trapn IP Adr
Text Field, Clear
Trap Manager n Destination Trapn Dst
None, Com, Aux, FDL,
EDL1, EDL2
General Traps
Gen Trap
Disable, Warm, AuthFail,
Both
Enterprise Specific Traps
Link Traps
Entp Trap
Link Trap
Trap I/F
Enable, Disable
Disable, Up, Down, Both
Link Trap Interfaces
Network, DTE, T1s, Ports,
All
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
H-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Asynchronous Terminal Operation
H-24
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Equipment List
I
Equipment
Feature Number
Model 3160 DSU/CSU
3160-A3-210
3164-A2-210
3165-A2-210
3100-F1-500
3100-F1-510
3100-F1-550
Model 3164 DSU/CSU
Model 3165 DSU/CSU
T1 Line Interface Cable, RJ48C-to-RJ48C
T1 Line Interface Cable, RJ48C-to-DA15P (Canada)
COM Port-to-PC Cable, 8-pin modular to DB9S
(Keyed – for Models 3164-A2 and 3165-A2)
COM Port-to-PC Cable, 8-pin modular to DB9S
3100-F2-550
(Unkeyed – for Model 3160-A3)
COM Port-to-Terminal/Printer Cable, 8-pin modular to DB25P
DC Power Cable
3100-F1-540
3100-F1-520
3100-F1-100
3100-C1-010
3100-F1-580
3100-F1-570
3100-F1-571
3100-F1-400
3161-B3-010
3100-F1-900
115 Vac Power Module
Front Panel Emulation Software
EIA-530-A-to-RS-449/422 Adapter
EIA-530-A-to-V.35 Adapter
EIA-530-A-to-X.21 Adapter
Wall-Mount/Rack-Mount Adapter
Model 3161 DSU/CSU
Auxiliary Backplane
NOTE:
Cable numbers for the 3161 DSU/CSU are located in the ACCULINK 3151
CSU and 3161 DSU/CSU General Information Guide and the COMSPHERE
3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
I-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I. Equipment List
I-2
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
A test pattern consisting of a one (1) followed by seven zeros (on the network only).
A rack-mounted device containing 17 slots in which to place circuit cards.
1in8 Test
3000 Series Carrier
Alternate Channel Alternate Mark Inversion. A method of allocating DS0 channels as a
group, so that every alternate DS0 channel does not carry data, but instead transmits and
receives all ones.
ACAMI allocation
method
A product family and a registered trademark of Paradyne.
ACCULINK
ACO
Alarm Cut-off command. A command for carrier-mounted DSU/CSUs that forces a
deactivation of the alarm relay on the 3000 Series Carrier.
Active configuration area. The configuration option set that is currently active for the
device. Before a configuration option set becomes active, you must save the set to the
Active configuration area.
Activ
Hardware that provides some transitional function between two or more devices.
A symbol (usually numeric) that identifies the interface attached to a network.
adapter
address
A software program housed within a device to provide SNMP functionality. Each agent
stores management information and responds to the manager’s request for this
information.
agent (SNMP)
A single bit stream that combines two or more bit streams.
aggregate
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal. An all ones signal transmitted to maintain transmission continuity
and to indicate to the receiving terminal that a transmission fault exists at either the
transmitting terminal or upstream of the transmitting signal. Sometimes referred to as Blue
Alarm.
Alternate Mark Inversion. A line coding technique used to accommodate the ones density
requirements of E1 or T1 lines.
AMI
American National Standards Institute. A member of ISO, ANSI accredits and implements
standards.
ANSI
The use to which a device is put.
application
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange. The standard for data transmission
over telephone lines. A 7-bit code establishes compatibility between data services. The
ASCII code consists of 32 control characters (nondisplayed) and 96 displayed characters.
A device that can be attached, either locally or remotely, to a DSU/CSU to display or print
alarm messages.
ASCII
terminal/printer
Data that is formatted so it is synchronized by a transmission start bit at the beginning of a
character and one or more stop bits at the end.
asynchronous data
An SNMP trap that indicates that the device has received an SNMP protocol message that
has not been properly authenticated.
authenticationFailure
trap
The auxiliary communications port on the DSU/CSU.
AUX port
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
GL-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
An 8-slot backplane that fit over one half of the open section of the 3000 Series Carrier. This
is a passive assembly that provides interconnection capability between 3151 CSUs and
3161 DSU/CSUs and provides all interface connectors.
Auxiliary Backplane
American Wire Gauge. An indication of wire size. The heavier the gauge, the lower the
AWG number, and the lower the impedance.
AWG
Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution. Encoding scheme for transmitting clear channel signals over a
T1 line.
B8ZS
The ability to reconfigure the DSU/CSU and restore data circuits through an external
backup device.
backup capability
bandwidth
BES
The range of frequencies that can be passed by a transmission medium, or the range of
electrical frequencies a device is capable of handling.
Bursty Error Seconds. A second in which more than one but less than 320 CRC6 error
events have occurred.
A signal in which successive ones (marks, pulses) are of alternating positive and negative
polarity, and in which a zero (space, no pulse) is of zero amplitude.
bipolar signal
bit
Binary digit. The smallest unit of information, representing a choice between a one or a zero
(sometimes called mark or space).
The insertion of ones into the outgoing bit stream to enforce ones density requirements.
bit stuffing
A method of allocating digital signal level 0 (DS0) channels as a group rather than
individually.
block allocation
method
Bits per second. Indicates the speed at which bits are transmitted across a data connection.
bps
Bipolar Violation. In a bipolar signal, a one (mark, pulse) which has the same polarity as its
predecessor.
BPV
A sequence of successive bits (usually eight) handled as a unit in data transmission.
byte
Consultative Committee on International Telegraphy and Telephony. An advisory committee
established by the United Nations to recommend communications standards and policies. It
was renamed ITU in March 1993.
CCITT
Carrier Detect. The received line signal detector. V.24 circuit 109.
CD
A bidirectional DS0, voice, or data path, for electrical transmission between two or more
points. Also called a circuit, line, link, path, or facility.
channel
Assigning specific DS0 channels in the device to specific interfaces (Network, DTE
Drop/Insert, etc.).
channel allocation
CHAP
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol. A security technique that allows a user
password to be encrypted for transmission.
A letter, figure, number, punctuation, or other symbol.
character
Customer Identification branch or the DSU/CSU menu tree.
A device that receives a specific service, such as database management, from a server.
The external clock interface on the DSU/CSU.
CID branch
client
CLOCK IN interface
ClrReg branch
Cnfig branch
coding
Clear Performance Registers branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.
Configuration branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.
A technique used to accommodate the ones density requirements of E1 lines.
GL-2
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Communications port. A computer’s serial communications port used to transmit to and
receive data from a modem. The modem connects directly to this port.
COM port
An identification used by an SNMP manager to grant an SNMP server access rights to a
MIB.
community name
A proprietary product family name and a registered trademark of Paradyne.
COMSPHERE
configuration
The arrangement of a system or network as defined by the characteristics of its functional
units.
Device software that sets specific operating parameters for the device. Sometimes referred
to as straps.
configuration option
CPU fail
Central Processing Unit failure. A Self-Test Health message indicating a failure in the
device’s central processing unit.
Cyclic Redundancy Check. A mathematical method of confirming the integrity of received
digital data.
CRC
CRC using six check bits.
CRC6
CSA
Canadian Standards Association.
Channel Service Unit. A device that connects service user equipment such as a DSU to the
local digital telephone loop, protects the line from damage, and regenerates the signal.
CSU
Control branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.
Ctrl branch
CTS
Clear To Send. A signal indicating that the device is ready for the DTE to transmit data.
Usually occurs in response to Request To Send (RTS).
Customer 1 configuration area. The first of two sets of customer-defined configuration
options.
Cust1
Customer 2 configuration area. The second of two sets of customer-defined configuration
options.
Cust2
The transmission standard that specifies 12 frames as a superframe that is used for frame
synchronization and to locate signaling bits.
D4
Connecting the COM port of one device to the AUX port of another device to provide SNMP
connectivity.
daisy chaining
The electrical interface between the device and the synchronous data terminal equipment.
An organized compilation of computerized data.
data port
database
A 15-position connector used on cables or devices.
DB15 connector
DB25 connector
DCE
A 25-position connector used on cables or devices.
Data Communications Equipment. The equipment that provides the functions required to
establish, maintain, and end a connection. It also provides the signal conversion required for
communication between the DTE and the network.
Data Channel LoopBack. Loops the data received from the network interface, for all DS0
channels allocated to the selected port, back to the network.
DCLB
A factory-preset value that is assumed to be correct unless changed by the user.
default
DevFail
Device Failure. A message that indicates that an internal failure has been detected by the
operating firmware. An 8-digit code appears for use by service personnel.
Device Health and Status branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.
DevHS branch
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
GL-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
A mechanical, electrical, or electronic unit with a special purpose.
A signal composed of only two discrete values, representing the binary digits 0 and 1.
A thin, flexible magnetic disk enclose in a protective jacket.
Download branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.
device
digital signal
diskette
DL branch
DLB
DTE Loopback. Loopback mode that loops the information received on the DTE T1 network
interface back to the network as close to the network interface as possible.
A process that transfers device firmware and software from a locally-attached PC to a
device, or allows the duplication of firmware and software from a local device to a remote
device.
download
A device that is connected farther from the host computer.
downstream device
drop/insert
An interconnection point for terminals, multiplexers, and transmission facilities. Individual
channels may be inserted into the aggregate stream or dropped out to accommodate
specific applications.
Data Set Ready. A signal from the modem to the DTE that indicates the modem is turned
ON and connected to the DTE.
DSR
DSU
Data Service Unit. Data communications equipment that provides timing, signal
regeneration, and an interface to data terminal equipment. A subrate DSU/CSU is normally
referred to as a DSU.
Digital Signal Cross Connect level 1. An interconnection point for terminals, multiplexers
and transmission facilities.
DSX-1
DS0
Digital Signal Level 0. A 64 kbps standard signal or channel.
Assigning specific DS0 channels in the DSU/CSU to specific interfaces (network, DTE
Drop/Insert, etc.).
DS0 channel
allocation
Digital Signal level 1. A signal of 1.544 Mbps in North America.
DS1
Defines objects for managing the network and DTE Drop/Insert interfaces on the DSU/CSU.
DS1/E1 MIB
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment. The equipment, such as a computer or terminal, that provides
data in the form of digital signals for transmission.
The Drop/Insert (DSX-1) interface on the rear panel of the DSU/CSU.
DTE Drop/Insert
interface
Data Terminal Loopback. Loopback mode that loops the data for a particular synchronous
data port back to the port just before it is combined with the rest of the T1 data stream.
DTLB
DTMF
DTR
Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency. A signaling method using two voice frequencies to designate
the tones used for touch-tone dialing, as distinguished from pulse dialing.
Data Terminal Ready. A signal from the DTE to the modem, sent via Pin 20 of the
EIA-232 interface (V.24 circuit 108/1, /2), that indicates the DTE is turned ON and
connected to the modem.
A wideband digital interface operating at 2.048 Mbps, defined by ITU recommendations
G.703 and G.704. It is used primarily outside North America.
E1
Embedded Data Link. The 8 kbps in-band performance channel that provides 4 kbps of
user bandwidth for the support of an SNMP management link.
EDL
EER
Excessive Error Rate. An error rate that is greater than the threshold that has been
configured in the device.
GL-4
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Electronic Industries Association. This organization provides standards for the data
communications industry to ensure uniformity of interface between DTEs and DCEs.
EIA
An Electronic Industries Association standard for a high-speed, 25-position, DCE/DTE
interface.
EIA-530-A
Enterprise MIB
MIB objects unique to a specific company’s devices.
A trap unique to a specific company’s devices.
enterprise-specific
trap
End of Number.
EON
error
A discrepancy between a measured or computed value or condition and the true or
specified value or condition.
Errored Seconds. A second with one or more ESF error events (one or more CRC6 error
events or OOFs).
ES
ElectroStatic Discharge. An undesirable discharge of static electricity that can damage
equipment and degrade electrical circuitry.
ESD
ESF
Fact1
Fact2
Extended SuperFrame. The T1 transmission standard that specifies 24 frames as an
extended superframe to be used for frame synchronization and to locate signaling bits.
Factory 1 configuration area. The first of two configuration option sets that are preset at the
factory (read-only options).
Factory 2 configuration area. The second of two configuration option sets that are preset at
the factory (read-only options).
An uncorrected hardware error.
failure
fault
An accidental condition that causes a functional unit to fail to perform its required function.
Federal Communications Commission. The Board of Commissioners that regulates all
electrical communications that originate in the United States.
FCC
Facility Data Link. The selected framing bits in the ESF format used in a wide-area link that
are used for control, monitoring, and testing.
FDL
Individual DS0 channels that may be sold separately or in groups to provide bandwidth that
is some fraction of the total E1 capability.
fractional E1
One identifiable group of bits that includes a sequence of bits for control, framing, etc.
frame
A high-speed connection-oriented packet switching WAN protocol using variable-length
frames.
frame relay
A technique that separates bits into identifiable groups.
framing
An extension to MIB II that defines additional objects for control of generic interfaces in
MIB II.
Generic-Interface
Extension MIB
A command providing read-only access to SNMP MIB objects.
Get command
(SNMP)
A physical connection to earth or other reference point.
ground
HDLC
High-Level Data Link Control. A communications protocol defined by the International
Standards Organization (ISO).
A computer attached to a network that shares its information and devices with the rest of the
network.
host
Hz
Hertz. A unit of frequency that equals one cycle per second.
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
GL-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Internet Control Management Protocol. Internet protocol that allows for the generation of
error messages, tests packets, and information messages related to IP.
ICMP
Identity branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.
ID branch
interface
Internet
internetwork
IP address
ISO
A shared boundary between functional units.
The worldwide internetwork, which predominantly uses the TCP/IP protocol.
An interconnected collection of networks (also called an internet).
Internet Protocol address. The address assigned to an internet host.
International Standards Organization.
International Telecommunications Union. The telecommunications agency of the United
Nations, established to provide standardized communications procedures and practices.
Before March 1993 it was called CCITT.
ITU
Kilobits per second. One kilobit is usually taken to be 1,024 bits.
kbps
LAN
Local Area Network. A privately owned and administered data communications network
limited to a small geographic area.
Line Build-Out. The amount of attenuation of the transmitted signal that is used to
compensate for the length of wire between the transmitter and the receiver.
LBO
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display. Thin glass plates containing liquid crystal material. When voltage is
applied, the amount of light able to pass through the glass plates is altered so that
messages can be displayed.
Link Control Protocol.
LCP
LED
Light Emitting Diode. A light or status indicator that glows in response to the presence of a
certain condition (e.g., an alarm).
The protocol that regulates the communication between two network nodes.
link layer protocol
link trap
A trap that identifies the condition of the communications interface (linkDown or linkUp
traps).
Line LoopBack. A test in which the received signal on the network interface is looped back
to the network without change.
LLB
LOF
Loss of Frame. Occurs when a DS1 terminal is unable to synchronize on the DS1 signal for
some interval.
Loss Of Frame Count. The number of LOFs declared.
LOFC
A test that verifies a device’s operation by connecting the device’s output to the device’s
input.
loopback test
Loss of Signal. The T1 line condition where there are no pulses.
Local Loopback branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.
Link Quality Reports.
LOS
Lpbk branch
LQR
The device that queries agents for management information, or receives unsolicited
messages (traps) indicating the occurrence of specific events.
manager (SNMP)
The master timing source used to synchronize all of the T1 and data port interfaces on the
DSU/CSU.
master clock
MB
Megabyte or megabytes. A unit of memory measurement equal to approximately one
million bytes (typically 1,048,576 bytes).
GL-6
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
2
Mbps
Megabits per second. One megabit is 1,048,576 (1024 ) bits.
The structure containing the menu hierarchy starting at a Top-Level menu and extending
down to various device functions.
menu tree
Management Information Base. A database of managed objects used by SNMP to provide
network management information and device control.
MIB
MIB Release 2. The current Internet-standard MIB, defined by RFC 1213.
A compact assembly functioning as a component in a larger system or unit.
Maximum Request Unit.
MIB II
module
MRU
A configuration of data processing devices used for information exchange.
The T1 network interface connector on the rear panel of the DSU/CSU.
network
network interface
NMS
Network Management System. A computer system used for monitoring and controlling
network devices.
A connection or switching point on the network.
node
A specific item within a Management Information Base (MIB).
Out Of Frame. An error condition in which frame synchronization bits are in error.
object (SNMP)
OOF
A hardware or software function that can be selected or enabled as part of a configuration
process.
option
Password Authentication Protocol. A security technique that requires a user password for
access to a system.
PAP
A way of checking data accuracy by counting the number of bits that have a value of one.
parity
PBX
Private Branch Exchange. Telephone switching equipment dedicated to one customer. A
PBX connects private telephones to each other and to the public dial network.
Personal Computer.
PC
Protocol Data Unit. A message containing protocol-specific information.
PDU
PDV
Pulse Density Violation. The number of ones (marks, pulses) is not adequate for the line
requirement.
Performance Report branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.
Perf branch
PLB
Payload Loopback. Loopback mode that loops the information received on the T1 network
interface back to the network after it has passed through receive and transmit framing
section.
The synchronous data port interface on the DSU/CSU.
PORT (1–4)
interface
The power input connector on the DSU/CSU.
POWER connector
power-on self-test
A test that checks most hardware components when power is applied to the device or a
reset is initiated.
Point-to-Point Protocol. A protocol for packet transmission over serial links, specified by
Internet RFC 1661.
PPP
Pseudo-Random Bit Sequence. A test pattern containing any possible combination of digital
ones and zeros for a given string length.
PRBS
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
GL-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Performance Report Messages. Messages indicating the current state of a T1 line as
specified by ANSI-T1-403.
PRM
A set of rules that determines the behavior of devices in achieving and maintaining
communication.
protocol
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network. A network shared among many users who can use
telephones to establish connections between two points. Also known as dial network.
Test Patterns branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.
Ptrns branch
pulse density
A measure of the number of ones (marks, pulses) in relation to the total number of bits
transmitted.
Quasi-Random Signal Source. A test pattern simulating a random pattern of digital ones
and zeros used to simulate normal transmission.
QRSS
RAM
Random-Access Memory. Read/write memory that is volatile and loses its contents when
power is removed.
A part of the device’s memory that holds stored values.
register
Rel branch
reset
Release branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.
An initialization of the device that occurs at power-up or in response to a reset command.
Request for Comments. One of the documents published by the Internet Engineering Task
Force that describe Internet protocols and policies.
RFC
Routing Information Protocol. A protocol for exchanging routing information.
An 8-position modular connector.
RIP
RJ48C
RLB
Repeater LoopBack. Loops the signal being sent to the network back to the DTE
Drop/Insert and data ports after it has passed through the framing circuitry of the device.
Remote Loopback branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.
Rlpbk branch
router
A device that connects LANs by dynamically routing data according to destination and
available routes.
An Electronic Industries Association’s standard for a low-speed, 25-position, DCE/DTE
interface.
RS-232
RFC 1659, which defines objects for managing RS-232-type interfaces (e.g., RS-422,
RS-423, etc.) and supports synchronous data ports and management communication ports
on the device.
RS-232-like MIB
An Electronic Industries Association’s standard for a general-purpose, 37-position,
DCE/DTE interface.
RS-449
RTS
Request to Send. A signal from the DTE to the device, indicating that the DTE has data to
send. V.24 circuit 105.
Receive. To obtain transmitted signals.
Receive Clock. V.24 circuit 115.
RX
RXC
RXD
Received Data. Pin 3 of the EIA-232 interface that is used by the DTE to receive data from
the modem. Conversely, the modem uses Pin 3 to transmit data to the DTE.
Shared Diagnostic Control Panel. A feature that allows carrier-mounted devices to share the
same diagnostic control panel.
SDCP
A test that checks most hardware components when power is applied to the device or a
reset is initiated.
self-test
GL-8
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
A device that offers a specific service, such as database management, to a client.
server
SES
Severely Errored Seconds. Usually defined as a second during which a specific number of
CRC errors was exceeded, or an OOF or other critical error occurred.
A command providing write access to SNMP MIB objects.
Set Command
(SNMP)
Superframe. Also known as D4 framing, the T1 transmission standard that specifies
12 frames to be used for frame synchronization and to locate signaling bits.
SF
Serial Line Internet Protocol. Protocol for serial operation on an internet.
Simple Network Management Protocol. Protocol for open networking management.
Status branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.
SLIP
SNMP
Stat branch
StEvnt
subnet
Status Event Register. Records the occurrence of certain alarm conditions.
A portion of a network, which may be a physically independent network segment, that
shares a network address with other portions of the network and is distinguished by a
subnet number. A subnet is to a network what a network is to an internet.
A number that identifies the subnet portion of a network address. The subnet mask is a
32-bit Internet address written in dotted-decimal notation with all the 1s in the network and
subnet portions of the address.
subnet mask
Data transmission that is synchronized by timing signals. Characters are sent at a fixed rate.
synchronous data
T1
A term for a digital carrier facility used to transmit a DS1 formatted digital signal at
1.544 Mbps. It is used primarily in North America.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The dominant protocol suite in the
worldwide Internet, TCP allows a process on one machine to send data to a process on
another machine using the IP. TCP can be used as a full-duplex or one-way simplex
connection.
TCP/IP
Virtual terminal protocol in the Internet suite of protocols. Allows the user of one host
computer to log into a remote host computer and interact as a normal terminal user of the
remote host.
Telnet
One of the ways in which bandwidth can be specified for multiplexer channel groups. Time
slots are specified by any number from one to twenty-four, with each time slot equal to
64 kbps.
time slot
trap (SNMP)
A notification message to the SNMP manager when an unusual event occurs on a network
device, such as a reinitialization.
Test Status branch of the DSU/CSU menu tree.
Transmit. To send signals from a device.
Transmit Clock. V.24 circuit 114.
TStat branch
TX
TXC
Transmit Data. Pin 2 of the EIA-232 interface that is used by the DTE to transmit data to the
modem. Conversely, the modem uses Pin 2 to receive data from the DTE.
TXD
Unavailable Seconds. A count of one-second intervals when service is unavailable.
UAS
UDP
User Datagram Protocol. A TCP/IP protocol describing how messages reach application
programs within a destination computer.
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. An organization which promotes product safety.
UL
An ITU-T standard for a low-speed, 25-position, DCE/DTE interface.
V. 24
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
GL-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
An ITU-T standard for a high-speed, 34-position, DCE/DTE interface.
An ITU-T standard for local and remote diagnostic loopback tests.
An ITU-T standard for a data channel loopback (DCLB).
An ITU-T standard for a data terminal loopback (DTLB).
Volts alternating current.
V. 35
V. 54
V.54 Loop 2
V.54 Loop 3
Vac
Volts direct current.
Vdc
Voice Frequency. The part of the audio frequency range used to transmit voice sound
(usually 300 Hz to 3400 Hz). This band is used by the modem for its modulated signal.
VF
Wide Area Network. A network that spans a large geographic area.
An SNMP trap that indicates that the device has reinitialized itself.
External Transmit Clock. V.24 circuit 113.
WAN
warmStart trap
XTXC
An outgoing signal transmitted when a DS1 terminal has determined that it has lost the
incoming signal.
Yellow Alarm
GL-10
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
A
abort
B
B8ZS (Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution) coding
Activ (Active) configuration area
agent
BPV (Bipolar Violation) condition
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) condition
C
cabling
Chan (Channel) Configuration branch
Alarm Configuration branch
CID (Customer Identification) branch
allocation
CLOCK IN interface
ASCII terminal/printer
ATI (Asynchronous Terminal Interface)
AUX Port
clocking
ClrReg (Clear Performance Registers) branch
coding
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
IN-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
COM Port
D
daisy chaining
database
DevHS (Device Health and Status) branch
community name
tables
DL (Download) branch
DTE Configuration branch
DTE Drop/Insert interface
connectors
rear panel
Ctrl (Control) branch
E
EER (Excessive Error Rate) condition
Cust1 (Customer 1) configuration area
Cust2 (Customer 2) configuration area
cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
Embedded Data Link (EDL)
equalization
IN-2
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
F
L
Facility Data Link (FDL)
Fact1 (Factory 1) configuration area
Fact2 (Factory 2) configuration area
failure message
LED Control branch
LED Status branch
LEDs, front panel
front panel
liquid crystal display (LCD)
Front Panel Emulation
LOF (Loss Of Frame) condition
loopback
G
Gen (General) Configuration branch
government regulations
government requirements
LOS (Loss Of Signal) condition
I
ID (Identity) branch
IP (Internet Protocol) addressing
Lpbk (Local Loopback) branch
K
keypad
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
IN-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
M
maintenance
O
objects
manager
master clock
OOF (Out Of Frame) condition
messages
alarm
P
status
Perf (Performance Report) branch
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
PORT (1-4) interface
MODEM Port
Mon (Monitor) branch
Port Configuration branch
power input
N
NET (Network) Configuration branch
network interface
power-up self-test
protocol
Ptrns (Test Patterns) branch
IN-4
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Q
S
self-test
R
rate
Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP)
Shared Diagnostic Control Panel (SDCP)
rear panel
Rel (Release) branch
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
reset
configuration options
MIBs
Reset branch
Rlpbk (Remote Loopback) branch
traps
specifications
Stat (Status) branch
STest (Self-Test Health) branch
3160-A2-GB21-90
February 2001
IN-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
T
T1
U
network
User Configuration branch
Test branch
V
W
worksheets
X
test jacks
Y
Yellow Alarm condition
troubleshooting
TStat (Test Status) branch
IN-6
February 2001
3160-A2-GB21-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|